Home

WLP - Software Manual

1. 218 WLP V9 90 eg ROTATION SPEED ACCELERATION ARIS When the digital input of the drive is 1 the digital output I is set and at the same time JOG is enabled at a speed of 0 3 RPS When the input 1 returns to 0 at the moment when the block ends i e when it stops completely the output I is reset 7 5 3 3 SPEED SYMBOL ROTATION SPEED OFFSET ACCELERATION DECELERATION Aes DESCRIPTION The SPEED block is formed by I input EN output ENO and 5 arguments being speed 115 offset 115 acceleration 115 deceleration 115 The input EN enables this block The output ENO informs that this block is being executed The SPEED block is responsible for writing the speed reference according to the direction of rotation speed offset acceleration and deceleration references for the axis selected by the axis parameter OPERATION When the input EN has been set to 0 the block does not operate and the output ENO is zero If the Input EN is 1 and no other moving block is active a trapezoidal profile will be executed based on the characteristics that has been programmed in the arguments to reach the speed that has been programmed in the SPEED block At this moment the argument OFFSET is added to the output of this profile and the output ENO changes to 1 If the input EN changes from I to 0 and the SPEED block is active a trapezoidal profile will be executed based on the characteristics that has b
2. Address 1X1 Tag KS witch 1 Description rei OnOff 1 Cancel Figure Tag definition box When clicking on OK this Tag will be saved in the Project and it will be used in all placeswhere the address in question is The Tag button changes and an asterisk is displayed at the front Tag indicating that the address in question already has a defined Tag Defining a Tag to the address makes it easy to identify if the address is being used in the project or not because all with Tag are displayed with an asterisk in the Tag button The locate tool allows identifying if the address in question is being used in the program After defining the address and the Tag click on the OK button of the contact property box Then it will have its representation according to next figure l volal 1 1 Figure NO contact So that Tag is displayed on screen instead of the contact s address click on the Tag Address button Ya in the Display menu Then the contact will appear in the following way 0 X Switch 1 0 Figure NO contact with Tag 7 step Select insert coil function e JE Ej ao Figure Select coil 8 step Go to the cell of line 0 and column 9 with the cursor 0 l 2 3 4 5 6 T 5 9 X Chave I 0 Lg Figure Position in line 0 col 9 9 step Click this cell with the mouse Ei 326 WLP V9 90 Figure Insert coil
3. a 1 SCAN CYCLE Exceptiong ZEROSW 1 163 164 Ei WLP V9 90 EN HOME JEROSW MINIMUM 4 SCAN CYCLE P EN Depending on P769 ENO 1 SCAN CYCLE EXAMPLE ol MX 2000 vo 2000 HMs ol 2001 ENO 5 ole 200 0 SFEED 1000 00 ACCELERAT IOH Fositivo H SIGM OFFSET 0 00 OFFSET Horano MW AROTATION Padr o MTYFE Real HASIS Considering that the drive has been reset recently or switched on when the digital input 1 goes from 0 to 1 activates the homing if the bit marker 2001 is at 0 The zero pulse search starts after the ZEROSW IX2 zero switch goes to 1 The motor decelerates and returns to the found zero pulse position plus the value of P769 as soon as the zero pulse is found The bit marker 2001 is set as soon as the positioning process has been concluded and then a new homing is enabled weg Language 165 7 5 2 4 TCURVAR SYMBOL EN TCURWAR ENO FOSITION ACCELERATION DIRECTION SPEED SOURCE SPEED GAIN AAIS DESCRIPTION It have 1 input EN 1 output ENO e 6 arguments speed 165 acceleration 115 syncronism 165 axis 116 The EN input is responsable to enable the block The ENO output informs that the block was finished Speed This field has 1 data type and 1 address The data type can be encoder auxiliary encoder of PLC2 or main encoder of POS2 user parameter word marker When the dat
4. Normally Open Contact Normally Closed Contact Figure Contact type In this box the type of address used by the contact is also defined according to next figure Ei 324 WLP V9 90 Bit Marker Bit Marker Digital Input Digital Output aly User Parameter Figure Type of address Once the type of address is defined one should define the address itself Each type has avalid address range which is always displayed in its property box In this example the address is defined as digital input 1 according to next figure Propeties 4 Normally Open Contact Type Digtal Input Address hl Tag als Own 1 3 le Drive 107 106 Cancel Help Figure Digital input 1 Range As you can see the digital input 1 is the card s first input It is always named as Proper The addresses named as Drive correspond to inputs or outputs of the Drive where this board is connected In this same property box is the Tag button This button is for defining which symbol will identify this address To define the symbol click on the Tag button The following box figure 33 will be displayed Address 1X1 Description sn Cancel Figure Tag definition box In this box one defines either the Tag or symbol of the address as well as a description about the address in question according to next figure Ei Tutorial 325
5. sh bit marker that indicates that the shift block in counterclockwise direction should be activated err word marker that defines the current block error reg float marker that indicates the number of pulses between the 2 last signals at the index input pul indicates the number of pulses received since the last signal was received at the index input EN input is responsible for the block enable AUTO input activates the error compensation ENO output changes to 1 only after the block captures the third index signal and there is no fatal error NOTE The signal index is received by pin 8 of the connector XC8 signal Z OPERATION This function aims at to correct the synchronization always a position variation between 2 signals received by the photocell The photocell signal called INDEX is received by the same pin through which the board receives the encoder zero pulse signals Therefore the encoder zero pulse signal should NEVER be connected Thus always the block is enabled EN 1 the INDEX read is enabled So when the 2 first INDEX s are detected the received number of pulses received during this interim is stored in the REG register This number of pulses is supplied by the RESOLVER SRC 0 or by the ENCODER SRC 1 SRC source is a block programming option and the standard value is always given by the RESOLVER After first INDEX has been received this function activates only the read of the next INDEX afte
6. Shut Down 10 4 Creating a New Project A new project can be created in the Project Menu with the New option according to next figure Edit View Page Insert Bu New Project z Ctrl M Open Project CirlHO Figure New project menu After clicking on the New Project button the following box will be displayed New project Hame Tutor E guipment PLC1 01 Firmware Version v2 Figure New project name In this box enter the name of the new project and click on the OK button Thus the new project will be created blank and with only one page In this example the Tutor1 project was created In the path where the WLP projects are saved C WEG WLP VX YZ Projects a folder was automatically created with the name of the new project Tutor1 according to next figure 322 Ei WLP V9 90 10 5 fr PROJECTS File Edit View Favorites Tools Help CE P a Search 11 Folders Ve 5 x te m jy Tutor Tutors _jTutorle O Tutorge C Tutor _jTutorze C Tutoride _j Tutors jy Tutor11 Tutore C Tutoriie C Tutor4 Tutor CamProfile J Tutor e O Tutor_CamProfile_e CJ Tutor5 Tutor CANOpenMaster CTutorSe Tutor CANOPenMaster CjTutor Tutor Macra Tutore C Tutor _Macro_e Tutor CjTutor7e CjTutorS i Tutor e Figure Path of the WLP projects This folder contains all the information and configurations that belong to the project When it is
7. 10 step Press the ESC key or select the pointer function In 21 RR NR Figure Select pointer function 11 step Go to the inserted coil with the mouse F 277 Figure Position inserted coil 12 step Double click the coil The following box will be displayed Propeties A Type Bit Marker Address a J Range aM Aetentive 1000 1671 hd Volatile 2000 3407 Cancel Help Figure Coil property box In this box it is possible to do the address configuration digital output n 1 output configurationis in the same way as the input ones previously described on step 6 with the Tag QX_K1 and description Counter K1 according to next figure Ei Tutorial 327 Propeties 4 Type Digital Output a Description Address l 1 Tag ag K1 Range OX Own 1 6 F z OM Drive 101 103 mea OF Cancel Help 0 3 3 4 5 6 7 g G X Sitch 1 0 Figure Coil properties 13 step To connect digital input I with digital output 1 select insert horizontal connection amp AE El Ieee Figure Select horizontal connection 14 step Go to one of the cells among digital input 1 and digital output 1 with the mouse d l 3 4 5 T g F X svatch 1 OX El 1 J Figure Position between NO contact and coil 15 step Click on this area and the program will create the connection bet
8. 118 WLP V9 90 Weg 1 torque current reference TORQUE CURRENT Depending on the chosen data type the torque current consists in a data type and an address or just a constant value The data type may be constant user parameter word marker float marker The torque current reference is set in percentage of the motor nominal current AXIS SLAVE Used in the MC blocks Movement Control It determines for which axis the speed and position reference will be generated It presents the following options Real axis controlled by the drive Virtual virtual axis MASTER Used in the MC blocks Movement Control It determines the reference source of speed and or position for the synchronism master axis It presents the following options Fast Counter program the function of digital inputs 1 and 2 P0300 and P0301 for Fast Counter option 4 configure the count mode in PO500 and the number of pulses per revolution in P0506 CANopen Encoder Input using the EEN1 or EEN2 accessory module on the SCA06 Virtual Axis RATIO NUMERATOR This argument will be the numerator of the synchronism ratio of the GearIn and GearInPos blocks The signal will indicate the movement direction if the value is positive the movement will be in the same direction as the master and if the value is negative the movement will be in the opposite direction of the master The RatioNumerator argument can be programmed
9. 222 WLP V9 90 Ei Is there anv active movement It executes the block CHART Speed Mode EN Torque Current Mode Ei Language 223 RUN STOP EXAMPLE Holl oo 0 Mola MX SOOO O Speed al W1010 pm al W101 The X1 digital input activates the drive general enable The X2 digital input enables the REF block which is programmed to be only speed reference being then sent to the drive the speed reference value contained in the user parameter P1010 7 5 3 5 MC MoveVelocity SYMBOL Execute ML Move Velocity Invelocity Acceleration Deceleration CommandAborted Error ErrorlC Bufferhode Updatel lode DESCRIPTION It executes a movement for the programmed speed When there is a transition from 0 to in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according 224 WLP V9 90 Weg to the configured arguments A movement will be executed for the speed configured in the Velocity argument with an acceleration deceleration configured in the Acceleration and Deceleration arguments The movement direction will depend on the speed signal If the speed is greater than zero the movement will be in the positive direction clockwise and if the speed is smaller than zero the movement will be in the negative direction counterclockwise When the programmed speed is reached the In Velocity outpu
10. 74 WLP V9 90 l 3 10 3 10 1 3 10 2 3 10 3 3 11 3 11 1 3 11 2 Window Cascade ACCESS Menu Window Cascate FUNCTION Cascate the windows of the all opening projects Tile Horizontally ACCESS Menu Window Tile Horizontally FUNCTION Arranges the windows as horizontal nonoverlapping tiles Tile Vertically ACCESS Menu Window Tile Veritcally FUNCTION Arranges the windows as veritcal nonoverlapping tiles Help Contents ACCESS Menu Help Contents Hot Key F1 Standard Toolbar FUNCTION It shows the Help for the current task or command About WLP ACCESS Menu Help About Hot Key Ctrl Shift A FUNCTION It shows information about the program weg Edit Operations Edit Operations Selecting Cells 1 Activate the pointer command 2 Click with the left mouse button on a cell and drag the mouse to the desired cell The selected cell may be deleted by clicking Delete CLICKING ON THE FIRST CELL 12000 00 Kill motion EM FOLLOW ENO SLAVE My TER INTEGER DIRECTION EM STOP ENO DECELER ATION MODE DRAGGING TO THE LAST CELL 12000 00 Kill motion EM FOLLOW ENG SLAVE MASTER INTEGER DIRECTION ENO DECELERATION MODE RELEASING THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON 15 76 WLP V9 90 Ei 4 2 SLAVE MASTER INTEGER DIRECTION 12000 00 pf fe an Kill motion f le Moving Ce
11. By means of the Application option of the Tools menu select the desired equipment according to the figure below Thereby one obtains access to the set of applications developed for use in the WLP Communicate Help LE Fl ol pLc2 00 CFWO09 gt SR DI Ki CFL In the WLP7 10 or higher the application menus were organized in conformity with the equipment and application type according to the next figure new methodology Communicate Help Fa PLO 00 CFWOo SRWOL j Create Multipumps Fixed Control In this example by clicking on the option Fixed Control a CFW11 Multipump Fix Control will be created In the WLP versions prior to V7 10 a structure in function of the equipment was used according to the next figure old methodology Communicate Help Create In this example by clicking on the create option an application for the PLC 2 will be created where a Ei 314 WLP V9 90 dialog box will be open next in order to define the type and name of the application Application vinder Note Even using the WLP V7 10 or higher there will still be applications developed with the old methodology which can be used without any restriction In both cases mentioned above after the selections and confirmations a configuration wizard 31 that will configure the application parameters will be initiated according to the example below
12. OPERATION When EN input is 0 the block is not executed and the ENO output keeps in 0 While the EN input is 1 and the comparison data I operator data 2 is true the ENO output goes to I Otherwise it changes to 0 EXAMPLE EN TRANSFER ENO SoIW101 HSRC DST W600 EN TRANSFER ENO 9TW102 HSRC DST SAWSOD0I EN IMT2FL ENO 0 MINT FLOAT r MMF9000 SoATW 6000 H FRAC EN INTZFL ENO 0 MINT FLOAT fr AF9001 SMIWE0O1 H FRAC BEAN BLV x it ae P aat DE OD 0X1 EN COMP ENO LK IF9000 H OPERATOR gt H DATA 1 SS MFS001 LH DATA 2 In this example if the value contained in the analog input 1 of the drive is higher or equal than the value contained in the analog input 2 of the drive the digital output is switched ON Otherwise the digital output I is switched OFF 7 5 7 2 MATH SYMBOL FLOAT FORMAT INTEGER FORMAT pow x EN MATH ENO MATH ENO EN MATH ENO EN MATH ENO DATA 1 DATA 1 RES DATA 1 RESH DATH1H QUOC OPERATOR OPERATOR OVER OPERATOR RESL DATALL REM DATA 2 DATA 2 SIGNAL DATA 2 SIGNAL OPERATOR OVER DATA 2 SIGNAL 262 WLP V9 90 eq pow or and xor nor shift nand xnor DATA 1 RES H QATA 1H RES H OPERATOR RES L QATA i L RES L DATA 2 OWER OPERATOR SIGNAL DATA 2 ashift DATALH RES H QATA i L RES L OPERATOR SIGNAL DATA 2 DESCRIPTION This block is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 4 arguments as follows FLOAT FORMAT INTEGER FORMAT
13. When the positioning is finished the ENO output goes to for on scan cycle and then returns to 0 Important This block operates with position loop so when it stops it continues in closed loop of position CINEMATIC EQUATIONS X x0 vO t 1 2 a0 t 2 1 6 J t 3 v v0 a0 t 1 2 J t 2 a a0 J t x end position X0 start position v end speed vO start speed a end acceleration aQ start acceleration J j erk 154 WLP V9 90 Ei FLOWCHART Is there one Hositioning active Did positioning finish ENO 1 CHART finish the block lt n Start positioning ENO Language 155 SCURVE MINIMUM 4 SCAN CYCLE ACCELE RATIO N gERK ENO TSCAN CYCLE EXAMPLE ol oh X 2000 k p oll amp 2000 IX EN SCURWE ENO Fositivo MSIGKFOSITION 20 50 MW POSITION 2000 0 4 SPEED S0000 0 H ACCELERATION 500000 H JERKE Relativo 4 MODE Real HASIS When a transition from 0 to 1 is captured at the digital input 1 a positioning is started with 20 5 revolution at a speed of 2000 rpm with an acceleration of 50000 rpm s and a jerk of 230000 rpm s 2 in the clockwise direction of rotation since the mode is relative and the positioning signal is positive After the positioning process has been ended it writes I during 1 scan cycle to the digital output 1 Remember that the jerk is the derivati
14. Configuration wizard Surface winder Step 1 of 5 Speed motor PISS Minimum speed reference rpm F134 Maximum speed reference rpm PFG Motor synchronous speed rpm Ramp F100 Acceleration time s F101 Deceleration time a Band 0 0000 10000 0000 Parameters of the selection command P220 Local Hemote selection source 1 Always Remote P221 Local speed reference selection 0 Keypad P22 Remote speed reference selection 11 PLC P22 Local forward teverse selection 2 Keypad Fwd P224 Local start stop selection 0 Keypad P225 Local JOG selection 1 Keypad P226 Remote forvard reverse selection 10 PLE Fwd P227 Remote start stop selection 4 PLC P228 Remote JOG selection 0 Disable After the configuration wizard steps the process for the transmission of the user program the user parameter texts and the parameter values old methodology or configuration wizards new methodology will be initiated always observing that only the selected item will be transmitted In the figure below the three items are enabled for the transmission Applications 315 Ivf User Program W Parameter Tag Old methodology WLP lt V7 10 Download W User Program W Parameter Tag Cancel W Configuration Wizards New methodology WLP gt V7 10 With this the creation process of the wished applicative is finished In case it be necessary to
15. Error FALSE Error TRUE ErrorlD 0 Update ErrorlD Done TRUE Example Weg Language 291 MCG 100 MX6101 Execute ME ReadRegister Done Slave Address Function 8000 M InitialDataS amp ddress oMK6102 SATW8200 H MumberOfData SAWS201 100 H Timeout SMW 5400 FALSE H Offset 7 5 10 5 MB_WriteRegister Block that performs a reading of up to sixteen 16 bit registers via Write Single Register or Write Multiple Registers of a slave on the Modbus RTU network Execute ME writeRegister Slave Address Function InitialDataSddress MumberOrOata Timeout Offset Value Block Structure Name Description OO Operation When this block detects a leading edge on Execute it checks whether the Modbus RTU slave in specified address in SlaveAddress is free to send data Busy variable at FALSE level If so it sends the writing request of Value values in a number of registers indicated by NumberOfData in InitialDataAddress address using chosen function in Function and sets the Active output resetting it when receiving the response from the slave If the slave is not free the block waits Busy go to FALSE level to resubmit the request 292 WLP V9 90 NOTE If Execute goes to FALSE level and Busy is still at TRUE level the request is canceled NOTE Value is an array of number of bits NumberOfData multiplied by 16 That is if NumberOfData is 16 Value can be an a
16. FUNCTION Select 75 and change the element properties DESCRIPTION For component property change double click with the left mouse button within the element 3 5 2 Delete Element ACCESS Menu Insert Delete Hot Key DEL Standard Toolbar a FUNCTION Deletes an element 42 WLP V9 90 Weg 3 5 3 3 5 4 3 5 4 1 3 5 4 2 DESCRIPTION The cursor acts like a eraser Click with the left mouse button on the element that should be deleted Comment ACCESS Menu Insert Comment Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a comment 130 DESCRIPTION The cursor becomes similar to the toolbar button shown above You can insert a comment by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the comment cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar Connection Horizontal ACCESS Menu Insert Connection Horizontal Standard Toolbar FUNCTION It draws an horizontal connection DESCRIPTION The cursor becomes similar to the toolbar button shown above You can insert a horizontal connection by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the horizontal line cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar Vertical ACCESS Menu Insert Connection Vertical Standard Toolbar iil FUNCTION It draws a vertical con
17. button and the cam profile editor will open as in the figure below 60 WLP V9 90 Ei EE CAM Edit lt tutor cpr D 07 g fl 3 There are following control in this window Point table Add points to the point table Insert points inthe point table Remove points from the pout table Mestre rot Escravo rot oe Se gt 3 aaj aja l Interpolation point between the point and the next point NJ Slave position for the point Master position for the point NOTES As already mentioned above the CAM block is always relative Thus the first point of the table point will be always master 0 and slave 0 Master virtual axis Slave effective axis drive Tools for the chart control Menus 61 Cursor Chart plotting area o1 02 05 D E og 07 Of 09 Master scale axis Slave scale axis Tools for the chart control melects the position line Zoom pelects the speed line Fit to Screen m lects the acceleration line melects the Jerk line Disables the selected line wets the selected Fit to Screen line mets the width of the selected line J i mets the height of the selected line ajal a FP sja sj ajea Cursor values Relative values for the point selected by the cursor r Cursor values Master 0 On rot Slave 0 0 rot Speed 0 0 rpm Acceleration O 0 rpm Jerk
18. status MC block not executed Internal fault m P g Language 239 7 5 5 Verify 7 5 5 1 INPOS SYMBOL EN INFOS ENO SIGN POSITION HYSTERESIS FORMAT MODE CORP AAIS DESCRIPTION It consists of 1 EN input I ENO output and 4 arguments as follows The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO input informs if the effective position is higher or equal to value programmed for the direction of rotation Hysteresis Depending on the chosen data type the hysteresis is formed by 1 data type and 1 address or constant The data type may be constant user parameter word marker In value is given in percent OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block will not be executed and the ENO output remains at 0 If the EN input is 1 the block compares the effective position signal and the effective position with the programmed signal position and hysteresis arguments When the effective position has the same signal which has been programmed and it is higher or equal to the programmed position increased by the programmed hysteresis value then I is transferred to the ENO output Otherwise 0 is transferred to the ENO output The hysteresis is used for preventing oscillation at the block output when the effective position is very close or it is equal to the programmed position For instance for a position of 10 revolutions with 1 hysteresis the block enables the ENO output when the effecti
19. Corrections SCA06 IDATA when used the data type PM WORD CFW500 force command analog input IW2 CFW400 upload Generating compilation errors when using SX3022 for CTW900 SSW06 SSW 7000 SX3024 for CTW900 SSW06 SSW 7000 SX3026 for SSW 7000 SX3028 for SSW06 SSW 7000 SSW06 removed the markers SX3032 SX3034 SX3036 SX3038 WLP V9 11 New functions Included versions 1 21 1 22 1 23 and 1 24 of the SCA 06 Correction of V9 10 functional deviations Compilation does not abort when ladder logic is incomplete and generate some incomplete binary code Virtual Axis option does not appear in MC CamTableSelect MW CamCalc MC Camln and MC_CamOut blocks Generated wrong l6bits dummy variable for 64bits disabled arguments In this case the markers SX3064 SX3066 SX3068 SX3070 SW3404 e SW3406 is dirtied Blocks mathematicians did not accept system word markers for SCA06 On editing a macro and save it through main ladder not ask to save the changes of this macro 14 WLP V9 90 Weg Opened wrong double monitoring box for REFCNT argument of CTENC2 block Applications Dancer Center Winder Load Cell Center Winder Functional Deviations 1 In the monitoring dialog of the analog input parameters the value shown in P0021 AI4 was wrong Modifications made in the current version of the application 1 Created the F799 fault to indicate that the CFW 11 softwa
20. Enable disable the X and Y axis 3 6 5 Application 3 6 5 1 Create ACCESS Menu Tools Application Create FUNCTION It allows the user to create a new ladder project based on applications 313 pre defined in the WLP 3 6 5 2 Configurate ACCESS Menu Tools Application Configurate FUNCTION It allows the user to configure an application 313 that has been previously created 3 Build 3 7 1 Compile ACCESS Menu Build Compile Hot Key F7 Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Compiles the project DESCRIPTION weg Menus 69 3 7 2 3 7 3 3 8 3 8 1 3 8 2 After compiling a dialog box is opened showing the possible compiling errors 39 errors 39 in the ladder editor and the location of the See also the error messages fatal errors 309 warnings 312 and information 313 about compiler Compile Subroutine USERFB ACCESS Menu Build Compile Hot Key Ctrl F7 Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Compiles the subroutine USERFB DESCRIPTION After compiling a dialog box is opened showing the possible compiling errors 39 errors 39 in the ladder editor and the location of the See also the error messages fatal errors 309 warnings 312 and information 313 about compiler Debug ACCESS Menu Build Debug Hot Key Shift F7 FUNCTION It enables or disables the debugging information Communicate Download ACCESS Menu Communicate Download Hot Key F8 B Comm
21. FE p Faa ET ee ow Polk 200 i oul 2 VU EN FUNC ENO IN OUT FUNCTION BE a T GE PET co TSN 2001 TSN 200 EN FL2INT ENO FLOAT INT FRAC TU WS02 oll W 803 rh MEOO DL ra et During the transition from 0 to I at the digital input 1 the user parameters 800 and 899 are converted to float and put into the float marker 9000 Then the square root is calculated from the value contained in the float marker 9000 and the result is saved in the float marker 9001 Then the value of the float marker 9001 is converted to integer and put into the user parameters 802 and 803 7 5 7 4 SAT SYMBOL DESCRIPTION This block has 1 input EN 1 output ENO and 2 arguments values input output 117 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output indicates when saturation occurs Since all data types of this block are float we recommend to use the blocks INT2FL and FL2INT in order to make the right conversions OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block is not executed and the ENO output changes to 0 While the EN input is 1 the block is executed The ENO output changes to 1 only if there is a saturation Otherwise the ENO output remains at 0 The function of this block is to transfer the input data to the output provided they are within the programmed limits When these values are higher or lower than the maximum and the minimum programmed ones the output value is saturated with these value
22. MX1000 672 MX1000 672 Markers MX1671 MX1671 MX1671 Volatile Bit MX2000 1308 MX2000 1308 MX2000 1308 MX5000 1100 MX5000 1100 Markers MX3407 MX3407 MX3407 MX6099 MX6099 Retentive MW6000 MWE6000 MWE6000 Word Markers MW6099 MW6099 MW6099 Volatile Word MW7000 650 MW7000 300 MW7000 650 Markers MW7649 MW7299 MW7649 System Bit SXO SXO SXO SX3000 SX3000 2 Markers 1 SX2 SX3 SX3 SX3040 SX3030 103 MW 8000 MW 8000 y 200 MW8199 MW8199 1 2 SW3000 SW3003 SW3002 SW3005 Retentive M95000 M95000 M95000 Float Markers MF9524 MF9524 MF9524 Volatile Float MF9000 MF9000 MF9000 MF9000 Markers MF9174 MF9174 MF9174 MF9199 100 4 25 175 100 100 2 3 System Word SWO 7 SWO SWO 7 Markers 1 DSWT PSWT PSWT 103 25 25 175 175 Ei 98 WLP V9 90 BOARDS PLC1 V2 0X PLC2 V1 5X POS2 V1 6X DATA TYPE CFW 09 CFW 09 SCA 05 First First Last Qty Last Qty SOFTPLC V2 0X SOFTPLC V1 4X First First Last Last Qty User UW800 100 UW1010 UW952 18 Parameters UW 899 UW1049 UW969 System PW750 PW750 PWO PWO 951 Parameters PW799 PW799 JPW 1009 JPWY9S50 Drive PDO 750 PDO 750 PDO 750 Parameters PD749 PD749 PD749 Board s Digital Inputs Drive s IX101 IX101 6 IX1 1403 IX1 6 Digital Inputs IX106 IX106 IX14 104 IX6 Boards Digital Output
23. SW3306 SW3308 SW3310 READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION Motor Speed rpm pO SpeedReference rpm 2 Aam Pa Falt Pa Td Current Flux 13 bits 2 g Current Torque 13 bits A O o Td Flux Current Reference 13 bit 1q Torque Current Reference 13 bits e Inverter Nominal Current HD A x10 Motor current without filter P003 A x10 Motor torque without filter x10 READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION Ready Pr General Enable Run Start Counter Clockwise 2 Coonter Clockwise O OG Pr pt Remote Pa Remote With Fatt Fault Reset Subvoltage 2 Quickly Stocp Changing speed direction S WithAlam fa InConfigMode 2 pond Ramp 2nd Ramp Activate Blocked On Acceleration On Deceleration Auto Tunning Start 1 Keyboard Torque Reference Stop 0 Keyboard Pd Speed Direction Keyboard S Local Remote Keyboard 2 JOG Keyboard Speed Motor 13 bit 2 Nominal Speed Motorlrpm 2 Speed Motor lpm 2 SpeedReference rpm 2 Alarm PO Ratt pr 110 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 1 4 Compatibility In order to use the ladder blocks under WLP see the following compatibility table This table presents which blocks are compatible with each board model PLC1 PLC2 POS2 SOFTPLC CFW 11 and SOFTPLC SSW 06 BOARDS EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY LADDER BLOCK SOFTPLC V2 0X SO
24. You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 9 3 SDO 3 5 7 10 ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks CAN Network SDO CAM Block Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a SDO 279 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar USERFB ACCESS Menu Insert Function Block USERFB Standard Toolbar baal FUNCTION Inserts a USEREB 294 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar IT Eq Menus 57 3 5 11 MMC 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 6 3 ACCESS Menu Insert Function Block MMC jg Standard Toolbar Mt FUNCTION Inserts a MMC 307 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar Tools
25. ajea P s a aa aea TUS Pa e n i F i i F E i i F F ane i i E F I F 1 i i F i I To change the interpolation type click on the type cell on the line that corresponds to the interpolation origin and select the desired one In the figure below a point has been changed to the cubic type of interpolation 63 E CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt Saar sesiea Ce me Now you can note other values in this curve beside the position such as speed acceleration and Jerk For better viewing of all values you can use the button Fit to Screen as shown below CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt ee ee ea In the same way we can select one of the values and use the button Apply selected Zoom In the example below a zoom has been given for the speed 64 Ei WLP V9 90 CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt E mep m me gree ee i i Serra prrresg tg rest reqs k E E Lt i Firrrqiursrrru Another important tool to be mentioned is the cursor In the example below the cursor is positioned on the point of the maximum speed CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt 1 Tur ee mi rsJrus s rer qs iT SSP reper i GE EET B i E E m E E B i Please consider that the speed acceleration and slave jerk values depend on the master speed Thus we recommend changing them in order to simulate them very near th
26. rvvrvrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennvennnvnnnnnennnnnennr 343 Analog Input Reading 0 10V40 TUlOr9d sccsscicscnscccsccccssnsanisnncadnsuaseusanaenaneestsannnscnceseeaenasentdaxeanentectadunetaaseenees 347 Analog Input Reading 4 20mA Tutor10 Laasestsssekd been 348 Motor control speed through PID block Tutor11 annnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenener 350 Parte XI Getting Help 355 1 Fixing computer Problems iets snes dere dires ieee vd eo ninwnieene ewstekiveeenedaivn ensicacaatasceacediavenswusenceanses 355 2 Nese 356 Parte XII Technical Support 357 T Reme SM vr 357 Index 358 Copyright O 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved 10 WLP V9 90 Weg Welcome WELCOME TO WEG LADDER PROGRAMMER Thanks for using WEG LADDER PROGRAMMER a graphic ladder program used to facilitate the PLC programming through an integrated development environment WLP is a powerful 32 bits tool that grants you characteristics and functionalities to create professional applications through simple mouse clicks Overview What the new in WLP WLP V9 90 New Functions Included CVW500 equipment Included versions PLC11 01 V1 70 PLC11 02 V1 70 CFW500 V1 80 CFW501 V1 80 and MW500 with the following blocks e MB ReadBinary 282 e MB WriteBinary 285 e MB ReadRegister 28 e MB WriteRegister 29i Included CAN configurator for PLC11 01 V1 70 and PLC11 02 V1 70 Included CFW 100 V
27. 00 pms Master speed Speed used for the speed acceleration and slave jerk calculation 62 WLP V9 90 Weg Master Speed 1 0000 rpm NOTE The speed acceleration and slave jerk should be used as reference for the cam profile development where they contents are calculated numerically without considering the load inertia torque and dynamic of the drive Adding a new point to the cam profile A point can be added by activating the button Add Point or Insert Point or by giving a double click on the chart at the position the new point should be added The double click can be given on any area of the chart If there already was an interpolation at this area the editor will insert this point between the two interpolation points The point will be always added as interpolation of linear type When a point is added or inserted through the respective buttons the master and the slave values enter as zero In the case the point is inserted this can cause a profile interruption since the master position must always increase relating to the origin In this case the master and the slave value must be edited by clicking on their cells in the point table The figure below shows the insertion of a point through a double click MM CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt E i a ma Lauk sa ka a do A oa aa cece a a a a B E EEE oan ret a Haster Slave 526457 Speed 1 052314 Acceleration 0 000000 Jeik 0 000000
28. Auto MSELREF ol FSOO2 4MF9O000 M REF D 00e 000 Wo REF 0 00e 000 H REFMANUAL iM F9001 M FEEDBACK 1 D0e 000 4 KF 2 00e 000 HKI D 00e 000 HKO 3 282 004 0 00e 000 MIN Faralel Durect HW TYFE70FT MX2000 EN FLZINT ENO EN TRAHSFER ENO ot FS002 FLOAT INT MWEDO MWSDOl HSRC DST BO VWIDOZ As explanation one can say that the reference value is given by the user parameter 800 and then converted to the float marker 9000 The value of the feedback signal is given by the value contained at the analog input I of the drive which is transferred to the word marker 6000 and converted to the float marker 9001 The control output of the PID block is the marker 9002 which is converted to the word markers 6001 and 6002 The value contained in the word marker 6002 is transferred to the analog output 2 of the drive FILTER SYMBOL EN FILTER ENO IN TIME CONST TYFE DESCRIPTION This block is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 2 arguments as follows values 117 input output filter type float 117 time constant seconds The EN input is rosponsible for the block enable The ENO output is a copy of the value of the EN input 0 As all data type of this block are float constant or float marker we recommend to use the blocks INT2FL and FL2INT in order to make the conversions to integer 254 Ei WLP V9 90 Filter Type The filter type is a constant and may be low pass filter high pass fi
29. Bit 1 General Enabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 0 Start Stop 0 Stop 1 Start S NOTES The drive will only execute the low bit command if the corresponding high bit is set to 1 one If the high bit is set to O zero then the drive will disregard the corresponding low bit value When P221 11 local reference via PLC and in local mode or P222 11 remote reference via PLC and in remote mode then the bits 0 and 2 Start Stop and Direction of Rotation have no function In this moment the Start Stop and Direction of Rotation commands are defined exclusively by the movement and positioning function blocks of the PLC board In this situation the speed reference will enter in the drive total reference so that the ramp parameters P100 P101 P102 and P103 have no effect and the ramps are being generated by the movement and positioning function blocks When P224 4 Local Start Stop via PLC and in local mode or P227 4 Remote Start Stop via PLC and in remote mode then the logic command bit and the system marker SX0 have the same function enabling the drive SWS5 Drive Logic Status Return PLC1 PLC2 The word that defines the logic status is formed by 16 bits 8 high bits and 8 low bits having the following construction High bits indicate the status of the associated function Bit 15 Active error 0 No 1 Yes Bit 14 PID regulator 0 Manual 1 Automatic Bit 13 Undervoltage 0 No I
30. Outputs DO DO DOS IG v The active inputs outputs are displayed in green color and the inactive inputs outputs are displayed in gray color 5 9 Monitoring via the HMI Through the HMI monitoring window it is possible to monitor and edit the parameter values In order to load this window it is necessary only to press the monitoring key on the HMI al In the same manner as in the online monitoring in this moment the WLP will try to establish the communication with the board by testing the communication with it and it will perform the same operations previously described The monitoring box via HMI has the following aspect Monitoring 91 5 10 Par metro Actual Value B Range 0 999 Force Inputs Outputs Through the force inputs outputs monitoring window it is possible to force the inputs outputs value of the a0 drive or board In order to load this window it is necessary only to press the force inputs outputs button In the same manner as in the online monitoring in this moment the WLP will try to establish the communication with the board by testing the communication with it and it will perform the same operations previously described The force inputs outputs window has the following aspect SOFTPLC CFW 11 92 WLP V9 90 Ei Force Inputs Outputs Digital Inputs Eis oe Enable Wo Value I T Wo 9 Digital Outputs 405 1 Enabl
31. Parameter Values ACCESS Menu Tools Parameters Value Hot Key F10 Communication Bar i FUNCTION Allow upload the values of the parameters and save in a file par Also load a file par and dowload to the parameters Note The Upload and Download function of the SRWO1 should only be used if The relays have the same hardware and same firmware version Please refer to the identification label to verify the product version A different hardware would be the model of the control unit CU with PTC protection SRWO1 PTC or earth leakage SRWO1 RCD and a different version would be those with different x or y numbering assuming that the firmware version is described as Vx yz Anybus ACCESS Menu Tools Anybus Hot Key F11 FUNCTION Allow to the user define the input and output variables that will be used by anybus CANOpen ACCESS Menu Tools CANopen Hot Key Shift F11 FUNCTION Configures the CANopen master network 58 WLP V9 90 3 6 4 Cam Profiles ACCESS Menu Tools Cam Profiles FUNCTION Allows you to load and edit cam profile tables Perfil Cam Table OD OG 9 Oo F 0 1 The cam tables to 10 are tables of fixed points which are transmitted at the moment of the download of the application In order to use the tables 1 to 10 first the MC_CamTableSelect block must be executed with the desired table and after the MC Camln block The cam tables 11 to
32. Project Examples Files Macro Files WSCAMN Files Current selection requires at least 42 8 ME of disk space Figure Type of WLP installation The Select Program Folder screen indicates the folder that will be used to file the shortcuts in the Windows start menu WEG standard folder and WLP Version WLP subfolder are recommended Click on the Next button Tutorial 319 z Select Start Menu Folder Where should Setup place the program s shortcuts Setup will create the program s shortcuts in the following Start Menu folder To continue click Nest 1f vo would like to select different folder click Browse WegiWLP VEZ Figure Location of WLP shortcuts In the next screen the definitions previously shown are displayed Check if all are correct andthen click on the Next button Select Additional Tasks Which additional tasks should be performed Select the additional tasks you would like Setup to perform while installing WLP Vee then click Hest Additional icons Create a Quick Launch icon Figure Selected options of the WLP installation After clicking on the Next button of the previous screen the installation process will be started and a bar will be displayed with the current status of the installation After that a text box will be displayed with the following option 320 WLP V9 90 Weg 10 3 Ready to Install Setup is now r
33. addres of the data to be transfer to the address of the value argument If the value of the index addrex was the valid value to read mode the ENO output is set otherwise reset For example if the data type to be read was a drive parameter and the value of the index address was less than 750 ENO will be set otherwise it will be reset And if the mode was programmed to write the value on value argument address will be transfered to the address of the index address EXAMPLE al ol 4 2000 DATATYFE ADDRESS ole MX 2001 7 5 8 5 USERERR SYMBOL EN USERERR ENO DESCRIPTION It is composed by I input EN I output ENO and 4 arguments listed below CODE Alarm or fault code 950 to 999 PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 750 to 799 SoftPLC CFW11 150 to 199 SRWO1 PTC and SRWO1 RCD TYPE Type of error 0 Alarm 1 Fault PLC11 01 PLC11 02 and SoftPLC CFW11 0 Error 1 Fault SRWO1 PTC and SRWO1 RCD TEXTL1 Error text line 1 12 characters TEXTL2 Error text line 2 12 characters 278 Ei WLP V9 90 7 5 9 7 5 9 1 The EN input is responsible for the enabling of the block The ENO output is on when block is active FUNCTION If the EN input is 0 the ENO output will be 0 When the EN input were activated the alarm or fault code will be displayed on the HMI with the respective text If it was an alarm and the block is disabled the alarm will be removed from t
34. format float format inteiro operator operator data I data 1 low part data 2 data I high part result data 2 result low part result high part overflow sinal The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output is a copy of the value of the EN input Format The format is always constant and it can be integer or float pointing Operator The operator is always constant There are the following options For float point 117 Sum Subtraction Multiplication Division For integer 117 Sum m gt g Language 263 Subtraction Multiplication Division Pow OR AND XOR NOR NAND XNOR Shift Ashift OPERATION The input EN always transfers its value to the output ENO While the input EN is ON the math instruction programmed between the arguments is executed For the float pointing format the executed instruction is given by float result float value 1 operator float value 2 In a division by zero a warning is generated during compilation time In case the division is performed with a float register on the denominator this verification does not occur however in both cases the value is saturated on the maximum or minimum float values depending if the numerator value is greater or less than 0 For saturation signal effects zero is considered a positive n
35. is the folder where WLP is installed INSTALLATION CHECK You can check if the installation was succesful from device manager drive needs to be connected to the PC e To run device manager click Start click Run type devmgmt msc and then click OK Another way to reach device manager is by clicking on Settings gt Control Panel gt System gt Hardware gt Device Manager e In the device manager window that appears near the bottom of the list you should find the entry USBIO controlled devices containing WEG USBIO RO2 This indicates that the installation was successful UNINSTALLATION e Connect the drive to the PC e Open the device manager and expand the entry USBIO controlled devices by clicking the sign e Now right click the WEG USBIO RO2 and select Uninstall e You will be prompted to confirm the uninstall Answer by clicking OK e Windows will uninstall the driver and then you can disconnect the drive from the PC Reconnecting the drive will start over the installation process described previously in Installing USB Driver Language Introduction Element Structure CONTACT HH The contact is a Boolean element that transfers the value to the horizontal link at the right side which is equal to Boolean AND of the horizontal link value at the left side with proper input output function and associated Boolean variable memory The contact does not modify the value of the associated Boolean variable COIL 4 Th
36. lt Project gt par files with the values of parameters lt Project gt tr file of trend variables graphic lt Project gt mv file of variables monitoring WORK FILES WORK FOLDER These files are created after compiling process CmpInfo txt information about the compiling programs and files Errors crd coordinates of the errors detected in the source program Errors txt Message about the errors detected in the source program lt Project gt bin executable program that can be run in the PLC DEBUGGING FILES DEBUG FOLDER Files created after compiling Files reserved by the System Project Tree By means of this box it is possible to access the files and the functionalities available for the project In order to activate this box use the View Project Tree menu 38 PROJECT TREE 29 30 Ei WLP V9 90 rele ldd x Ladder Diagrams rele ldd Configuration Wizards l Monitoring Dialogs Diagnostic Measurements Control Signals Trend Variables Dialog trend 1 tr Monitoring Variables Dialog monvar 1 mv H Parameters Value Dialog par par Monitoring Inputs Outputs Dialog Monitoring Parameters by HMI The project tree has the following items Ladder Diagrams It lists all the ladder files of the project In order to open the ladder file give a double click on the file name For the PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 besides the main ladder the followi
37. user parameters system parameters and digital outputs To write in variables used in contacts or coils you must give adouble click on it To write in variables used in function blocks you must give a double click on the variable connector as shown below ae 2000 OU 3 In this box you must write now the new value to be written and confirm it by key Variables Monitoring Through the variable monitoring dialog box you can check the status of the variables used in the ladder program indifferent if you are monitoring the ladder program or not For loading this dialog box press the variable monitoring button All In the same manner as in the online monitoring the WLP will try to establish the communication with the board by testing the communication with this board and it will execute the same operations described previously The variable monitoring dialog box has following features Monitoring 83 WLP Variables Monitoring File Help Address Value For inserting new variables press the button insert and the following dialog box will be displayed Insert Variable Tree TT Address Symbol For executing this dialog select Type Address and a representative Symbol In the example below has been selected the word marker 7MW6000 Insert Variable Type k Word Marker Address 5000 symbol T ime cancel The monitoring dialog box will have following features
38. with Bit 12 Local Remote command 0 Local 1 Remote Bit 11 Jog command 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 10 Direction of Rotation 0 Counter clockwise I Clockwise Bit 09 General Enabling 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Bit 08 Start Stop 0 Start 1 Stop Low bits indicate the error code number POS2 106 WLP V9 90 Weg E MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SXO Drive Enabling Return Drive Enable SX2 Fatal Error Reset SX3 Analog Input Alarm SWO Drive Speed Return rpm SWI1 Drive Speed Return 13 bits DSW2 Generate User Error SW3 Board Error Return TSWS 106 Drive Logic State Return SW6 Encoder Input Speed Return rpm PSWT Reference Speed Return rpm TSW8 Virtual Axis Speed Return rpm SWS5 Drive Logic Status Return POS2 It indicates the servo drive actual status according to below 0 Servo drive disabled and without error 1 Servo drive ready enabled and without error 2 Servo drive in error status The HMI display shows the error code SOFTPLC CFW 11 SX3000 General Enabling active SX3001 General Enablinh O SX3002 RampEnaled o O SX3003 StartlStop SX3004 Speed Direction o SX3005 Speed Direction SSS SX3000 106 PG SX3007 S o O SX3008 Local Remote KE SX3009 LocalRemote SS SX300 Fatt o
39. 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments The search will be executed with the speed configured in the Velocity argument and an acceleration deceleration configured in the Standard Profile When the search finishes the user s reference position P0052 and P0053 is changed to the SetPosition argument value and the Done output goes to during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 10 arguments which are Direction 119 Velocity 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished OPERATING MODE When the MC StepRefPulse block is executed the drive will start operating in position grid and remain so even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Homing When concluding the search the shaft status will change to Standstill BLOCK ERRORS Error er Ei Language 201 Speed programmed below the minimum allowed Speed programmed above the maximum allowed Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in
40. 06 100 00 4 Velocity sEN5507 500 00 Acceleration Command4borted VCT6s08 500 00 Deceleration Error Desabilitado ErrorlD P D zabilitado ABORTING MButferkode RIEING MA Updatekvlode 188 Ei WLP V9 90 anog E amp A ned ee F MX6503 O0 gt i re i TF FA T J C 10020m j0 MX6505 771 PL TT gt LL TT gt aed SS gt MX6509 ee T Velocidade 200 2HMX 506 2HMX6507 100 Posicao 15 10 In the transition from 0 to 1 the bit marker 6500 the first MC MoveAbsolute block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the positioning for position 10 revolutions starts In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6505 the second MC MoveAbsolute block is instantly executed BufferMode Aborting thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the positioning for position 15 revolutions starts At the same time the Busy and Active signals of the first block bit markers 6501 and 6502 are reset and the CommandAborted signal bit marker 6503 is set for 1 scan When the position 15 revolutions is reached the Done output of the second block bit marker 6509 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 are
41. 1 only via CAN protocol 2 PLC board enabled as the CANOpen master 3 only in integer format 4 possibility of operations in double float 5 one block at a ladder and only with optional board IOS6 of SSW06 Types of arguments POSITION POSITION OFFSET The position offset comprises three parts Signal number of revolutions fraction of revolution Signal Depending on the chosen data type the signal comprises a data type and an address or a constant value The data type of signal may be constant user parameter bit marker digital input Weg Language 115 For the constant data type the value may be positive negative Number of Revolutions Depending on the chosen data type the number of revolutions consists in a data type and an address or a constant value The data type may be constant user parameter word marker For the constant data type the value must be programmed according to the unit that has been configured in the project and the configuration of the field Fraction of Revolution is nt required For the user parameters and the word markers should be considered for this field the number of revolutions Fraction of Revolution The fraction of revolution consists only in an address since it shares the same data type of the field Number of Revolutions When the data type is constant this value is ignored and only the constant configured in the field N
42. 1 input PRESET 1 output Q and 6 arguments as follows Reset Count Reference REF CNT Preset PV Count Mode MODE Encoder SRC Accumulated Value CV The input EN is responsible for block enabling The input PRESET transfers the value defined on PV to the Accumulated Value CV The output Q is turned ON during one scan cycle if the accumulated value CV reached the number of desired pulses REF CNT After one scan cycle the output is turned OFF Reset There are two reset modes reset via main encoder null pulse or reset via bit register digital input digital output or user parameter Counting Mode MODE The counting mode is always constant and the following counting modes are available Mode 1 the counting is performed in quadrature between signals A and B as presented in the following figure The result has a resolution that is four times the encoder resolution 256 WLP V9 90 Weg Mode 2 the counting is performed using only signal A Signal B defines if the counter will count up or count down P S Only the auxiliary encoder on PLC2 board and the encoder on POS2 board have the counting option for mode 2 since they are not being used for position feedback Sinal A Encoder SRC It is possible to choose which encoder will perform the pulses counting the main encoder or the auxiliary encoder Operation If the input EN is OFF the Accumulated Value CV arg
43. 117 CONTROL It determines the control type that is used for executing the block It offers following options Automatic as function of the control previously selected for the block Speed Position INTEGER Depending on the chosen data type the total part consists in a data type and an address or constant value The data type of the integer part may be constant word marker user parameter Attention When the integer part refers to an output result of any block the constant data type is not allowed The limits to integer are maximum 32767 minimun 32768 FLOAT The float comprises a data type and an address The float data type may be float constant float marker Attention When the float refers to an output result of any block the float constant data type is not allowed The float limits are maximum 3 402823466e 38F minimun 1 175494351e 38F LIMITS The limits consists in 2 parts integer 1171 float 117 maximum integer 1171 float 117 minimum INPUTS VALUES OUTPUT VALUES The values consists in 2 parts integer 1171 float 117 input integer 117 float 117 output CONTROL MODE It determines the type of reference that will be sent to the drive The data type may be constant user parameter bit marker digital input It offers following options 0 speed reference
44. 2 and 3 not configured according to SwitchMode EXAMPLE 196 WLP V9 90 weg 0 l 2 E 4 5 6 7 5 9 oh 6500 oh a 505 i Execute PL Step AbsSwitch Done Real l MC _SantchMegative H Direction oh S650 MC EdgeOit H Switch lode Active aha Soe 100 00 W velocity Command amp borted He Desabilitado 5 Error Desabilitado ErrorlD fe Desabilitada 3 With the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6500 the MC StepAbsSwitch block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the search of the AbsSwitch starts In case 1 when the block is executed the AbsSwitch is not activated since the Direction argument is configured as MC SwitchNegative the movement will be in the negative direction When a falling edge in AbsSwitch SwitchMode MC EdgeOff occurs the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred In case 2 when the block is executed the AbsSwitch is activated since the Direction argument is configured as MC SwitchNegative the movement will be in the positive direction and when leaving the AbsSwitch the motor stops and changes the movement to the negative direction When a falling edge in AbsSwitch SwitchMode MC EdgeOff occurs the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred In case 3 when the block is executed the AbsSwitch is not activated since the Direction arg
45. 7 g G CONVERT MINIMUN SPEED F133 AND MAXIMUN SPEED F134 MX 2002 ME 2002 l EH TRANSFER ENO EH IWT2FL ENO G wPD133 HSRC DST fr 25177002 MCW TO02 MINT FLOAT PM FoO 14 z wMX2002 ME2004 ME 2003 3 MI W7010 4 MX 2003 ME 2004 i EN TRANSFEREN S PDl34 HSRC OST br Mw SMW TOOS SMFS 5 sMY2002 M2004 ME 2002 s H R 1000 MWO ME 2004 R PID CONTROL wIX MX3407 10 Auto SAM FOO20 11 MI FOOL 3 0 000 0 00e 000 H REFMANUAL 12 Ah FSO FEEDBACE MI FSOLO MFSOLL 13 MF9012 w MIF9O1 5 MSO 4 Academic Direct H TYFE 0FT Figure Tutor11 Page 4 of 5 Functioning page 4 On this page it is read the maximum and minimum value of the PID block output which will be used to control the motor speed These values are being removed from P133 and P134 parameters that are already adjusted for the motor minimum and maximum speed In this example there is a timing between the actuation of these transfer blocks This is necessary because the drive parameter reading is slow and it takes the CPU quite some time to do it Therefore the performance of the control referred to is improved since it is not necessary a continuous reading of these parameters Here you find the PID block whose functioning depends on the handling of the parameters done in the previous steps 354 WLP V9 90 Weg 9 l 2 3 4 5 T 2 i ENARLE DRIVE ol 407 MIE HSRC DST E SED 2 i FEEDBACE OF DRIVE ENABLE
46. Aceleration 119 Deceleration 119 Buffer Mode 119 Update Mode 126 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished 190 WLP V9 90 Weg OPERATING MODE When the MC_Moverelative block is executed the drive will start operating in position grid and remains this way after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the positioning the shaft status will change to Discrete Motion When the positioning is concluded the shaft status will change to Standstill BLOCK ERRORS Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Single when another block is active Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status 70 Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another block is waiting 7 Drive in the Homing status 78 93 94 Jerk programmed above the maximum allowed 5 It is not allowed to execute positioning with Jerk when another block is active EXAMPLE Language 191 Execute PAC bMoveRelative Real 10 000000 H Distance 200 00 WM Velocity 1000 00 H Acceleration Command 4borted 1000 00 H Deceleration Error
47. Author W eg 4ubomacao Project Date 21 fO2 2008 Project Time 09 38 44 Commands Parameters Value Table It is a tool that allows to read the values of the parameters of the board clicking on Upload button Also it is possible to transfer values from the list of the dialog to the board clicking on Download button This list can be edited saved to a file or loaded from a file par Below follow an exemple of a reading process of the parameters values 94 Ei WLP V9 90 6 2 Reading Peds b2 Cancel Upload P750 Download Pio Pra Carrega Salvar P753 Pra Ww Fechar Editar Deletar eg CC Pros P756 P757 P756 marnm 12 D DO A A A Communications General Review Comunica o Download 69 Serial Cable XC7 Connector Speciication SVDC supply Current capacity 50mA Request to send Gr 3 GND Reference O 4 rx Reeves 0S 3 GND Reference SCS ef 1x transmits SS CONNECTION The figure below shows how must be done the RS 232 link point to point between PC and drive Ei Communications 95 6 3 kS 232 FI A cable to RS 232 B connector X4 D Drive WEG CABLE The figure below indentify the parts of the cable used to RS 232 2 RXD gt 6 GND L FITTLL A flat cable 6 wires only 2 3 and 5 pins of the DB9 connect
48. CFW 11 SRWO1 RCD V4 0X PID EE ee eee ee eee ee FILTER KG ee ee ee ee eee AUTOREG DMUX QSTOP 7 E 3 CAM v RTC 7 pp 7 A USERERR EE a ee a a REF my E MMC MC Power pp 7 MC Reset 2 6 _MoveRelative 5 MW IqControl VE MC Stop MC Gearln v R MC_GearinPos _ MC_Phasing v mccero id MC StepAbsSwitc v p h MC_StepLimitSwi gt tch MC_StepRefPulse MC_StepDirect pp MC_FinishHomin CFW700 CFW701 e CTW900 weg Language LADDER BLOCK NO CONTACT NC CONTACT COIL NEGATE COIL SET COIL RESET COIL PTS COIS NTS COIL INPOS INBWG SCURVE TCURVE HOME FOLLOW MSCANWEG SHIFT STOP JOG SETSPEED TON CTU TRANSFER MATH COMP SAT FUNC INT2FLOAT FLOAT2INT PID FILTER AUTOREG RXCANWEG CTENC USERFB MUX DMUX IDATA TCURVAR QSTOP SDO CAM CALCCAM SPEED BOARDS EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY CFW700 CTW900 CFW701 a ee ee MN MN Hil Hit Hi KE a a ee ee IN IN Ht i Hi i 113 l 114 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 1 5 BOARDS EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY LADDER BLOCK CFW700 CTW900 CFW701 RTC Of v USERERR v v f REF v v MMC EE ee ee MC Power MCReet OO bd Mcs 1 Tooo a MCGearnPos i Sd MCPhasing f MC GearOut MC StepAbsSwit ch MC StepLimitSw itch mose 1 MC ST 2
49. Desabilitato Errorl P D abilitado Aborting MBufferklode RISING MAUpdatelvlode Execute M kMoveRelative Real 5 000000 H Distance 100 00 H Velocity 00 00 H Acceleration CommandAborted h CTs 50 i 7 300 00 H Deceleration Eror Desabilitaco ErrorlD Desabilitade Aborting W Buffer lode RISING H Updatellode Complete execution of the two blocks 192 Ei WLP V9 90 MX6500 tg vA MX6501 i A S S MX6502 TH MX6503 t E 294 MX6504 Km GT tt v MX6505 t SE ae ae vo MX6506 to vA MX6507 to y va MX6508 to 29 MX6509 Ha met a a Fosic o 17 12 7 In the transition from 0 to 1 the bit marker 6500 the first MC_MoveRelative block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the positioning of 10 revolutions starts When the positioning of 10 revolutions the first block is concluded thus the Busy and Active signals of this block are reset and the Done output bit marker 6504 is set for 1 scan With the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6505 the second MC MoveRelative block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the positioning for position 5 revolutions starts When the positioning for 5 revolutions finishes the Done output of the second block bit marker 6509
50. EN CTENC2 P RESET RESET OCC SAVE SAVE OCC REF CHT CV Fl Sy RESTART SRC Description It counts the pulses of the encoder connected to the digital inputs 1 and 2 Quick Counter or to the expansion modules of encoder input EEN1 and EEN2 Counter 1 Counter 2 It is composed of 1 EN input 1 PRESET input 1 Q output and 10 arguments which are Reset 258 Save 259 Refer ncia de contagem REF CNT Preset PV Restart 259 Encoder SRC 259 Reset occurred RESET OCC 258 Save occurred SAVE OCC 259 Current value CV 259 Saved value SV 259 The EN input is responsible for enabling the block and starting the counting of the pulses The PRESET input assigns the preset value contained in PV and CV The Q output goes to I during a scan cycle if the value of counted pulses CV reached the desired number of pulses REF CNT returning to 0 later Reset The reset of the current value CV can be through bit marker digital input user s parameters leading edge DI3 falling edge DI3 leading edge Z counter 1 falling edge Z counter I leading edge Z counter 2 falling edge Z counter 2 Note The reset by leading falling edge DI3 is only allowed when the counting source SRC is the Quick Counter DI1 DI2 m P g Language 259 The reset by leading falling edge Z is only allowed when the counting source SRC is Counter 1 EEN 1 EEN2 or Counter 2 EEN2 Save The saving of
51. LimitSwitch the motor stops and changes the movement to the negative direction When the leading edge in LimitSwitch SwitchMode MC EdgeOn occurs the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred All the movements are performed with an acceleration deceleration programmed in the Standard Profile except when the LimitSwitch is found case in which the motor stops instantly When returning to the leading edge position of the LimitSwitch the Done output of the block bit marker 6501 is set and remains in I while the Execute input bit marker 6500 is set In the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6501 the MC SteoRefPulse block is executed and starts the null pulse search The movement will be in the positive direction and when the null pulse is found the motor stops and returns to the null pulse position All the movements are performed with an acceleration deceleration programmed in Standar Profile When returning to the null pulse position the Done output of the block bit marker 6502 is set and remains in I while the Execute input bit marker 6501 is set The user s reference position P0052 and P0053 is changed to 10 5 revolutions P0052 8192 and P0053 10 When the bit marker 6500 is reset the bit markers 6501 and 6502 are also reset MC StepDirect SYMBOL Execute ML StepDirect SetPosition DESCRIPTION It changes the user s reference position When there is a transition from 0
52. Points value bigger than the Maximum Number of Points Master Position value smaller than the Master Position of the previous point eg Language 183 7 5 2 7 SHIFT SYMBOL EN SHIFT EHO INCREMENT ROTATION AAIS DESCRIPTION It consists of 1 EN input I ENO output and 3 arguments as follows increment float result 117 axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enable OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block will not be executed and the ENO output reminas at 0 If the EN input is 1 and no positioning block is active excepting the block Follow then the block increments the motor shaft position by the positioning increment value per second As soon as the EN input changes to 0 the position increment stops and the ENO output changes to during a scan cycle and then returns to 0 again NOTE The increment can be updated online Important This block operates in position loop and remains in this status even after ending the work FLOW CHART S 184 WLP V9 90 SHIFT Is there any active positioning Was it being executed N Executes stopped the block Y N Finishes the block i CHART 1 EN 0 1 scan cycle ENO 0 4 Increment second Position EXAMPLE Ei Language 185 7 5 2 8 LE bl I EN SHIFT ENO I NCREMENT ROTATION AsIS When the digital input 1 is activated the motor sh
53. RC DE MLE 407 EN TRANSFER ENO 5 SPEED REFERENCE TO DERIVE FROM PID BLOCE MA 407 i EN FLZINT ENO MF9020 MW 7004 9 ol 2000 mM 2000 10 vok 2000 MOD ol 407 L c EN SETSPEED ENO Clockanse MROTATION 12 sok W7004 MSPEED 3600 0 MW ACCELERATION Real WASIS 13 Figure Tutor11 Page 5 of 5 Functioning page 5 On this page it is done the enabling of the converter and speed control according to mentioned in the item Tutor5 The only difference here and very important is that the steeped block has its speed adjusted by the PID output This can be observed in line 8 and 11 of this page Control strategy The PID Controller module its manipulated variable OUT so that the process variable FEEDBACK is equaled to the reference REFERENCE That is the PID acts indirectly on the process variable through an actuator or manipulated variable and the process variable is the process answer to the stimulus generated by the actuator or manipulated variable We normally define the difference between REFERENCE and FEEDBACK as the controller error signal that is Error REFERENCE and FEEDBACK and we say the PID finds a value for the output OUT in which the controller error is equal to zero Exampl PID Pressure control Ei Tutorial 355 11 11 1 REFERENCE OUT E FEEDBACK Figure Pressure control example In this example the inverter controls the s
54. See item Paste Cells 77 Find ACCESS Menu Edit Search Hot Key Ctrl F Standard Toolbar Fl FUNCTION Searches the coordinates in the element editor with the indicated address after Start button has been pressed The a window with the page line and column of all found elements is open This window is only closed when button Close or button Sys X is pressed DESCRIPTION For searching addresses in the editor you must specify a possible address Otherwise the button that starts the search will be disabled To see possible address range see Data Type 97 View Standard Bar ACCESS Menu View Standard Bar Hot Key Ctrl Shift P FUNCTION Shows or hides the standard bar Communication Bar ACCESS Menu View Communication Bar Hot Key Ctrl Shift C FUNCTION Shows or hides the communication bar Edition Bar ACCESS Menu View Edition Bar Hot Key Ctrl Shift D FUNCTION Shows or hides the Edit Bar Block Bar ACCESS Menu View Block Bar Hot Key Ctrl Shift B FUNCTION 38 WLP V9 90 Ei 3 3 9 3 3 6 3 3 7 3 3 8 3 3 9 Shows or hides the block bar Page Bar ACCESS Menu View Page Bar Hot Key Ctrl Shift G FUNCTION Shows or hides the page bar Status Bar ACCESS Menu View Status Bar Hot Key Ctrl Shift U FUNCTION Shows or hides the Status Bar Project Tree ACCESS Menu View Project Tree Hot Key Ctrl Shift H FUNCTION Shows or hides
55. Transfer the program lt F8 gt or under Menu Communication Transfer User Program Weg Overview 27 2 4 Introduction Ladder diagram is a graphic presentation of Boolean equations by combining contacts input arguments with coils output results and functional blocks The Ladder program allows to test and change data by standard graphic symbols The symbols are positioned in the ladder program similar to a logic diagram line with relays The Ladder diagram is limited at the right and at the left by bar lines GRAPHIC COMPONENTS See below the basic graphic components of a Ladder Diagram ig i A Left power rail B Right power rail C Horizontal connection D Vertical connection E Contact F Coil G Power flow Power rails The Editor is left delimited by a vertical line known as left power rail and right delimited by a vertical line known as right power rail Connections Elements and States The connection elements may be horizontal or vertical The status of the elements can be denoted by 1 or 0 corresponding to true I or false 0 boolean values respectively The term Connection Status should be synonym of the term Power Flow The status of the left power rail can be considered always equal to 1 No status is defined for the right power rail A horizontal line should indicate a horizontal connection element A horizontal connection element transmits the status of the elements immediatel
56. V7 12 Beta Correction of VB7 11 functional deviations Address of the SRWOI stack was incorrect this caused an error when coils in parallel were used It did not open VB6 21 and V6 22 version files The text of the parameters for the SRWO1 wizards was updated New functions The bit marker SX3033 was inserted torque reference compatible with the VE1 20 CFW11 SoftPLC Files of the SSW06 parameter HMI were added WLP VB7 11 Correction of VB7 10 functional deviations PLC11 subroutine must not access drive parameters PLC11 by erasing a block that had internal float it generated error in USERFB address calculation PLC11 internal resources calculation bug when using a USERFB PLC11 the description of the SX3068 and SX3070 markers when the tag option is selected was corrected when compiling F7 or downloading F8 it must save all the files PLC11 USERFB compilation error output parameters with wrong mask eg Overview 21 PLC11 boolean USERFB parameter monitoring error PLC11 bug in the TRANSFER and IDATA inside the USERFB the firmware was not identifying the type of USERFB parameter PLC11 USERFB compiler bug was calculating wrong addresses for the USERFB parameters the bug that could occasionally occur by adding removing numerical value monitoring boxes due to the interaction between the main and the monitoring threads was corrected IDATA address value for constan
57. Why There is a vertical connection that does not have one of the limit elements Action delete the vertical connection Note error available only in WLP V1 00 Error C111 contact can not be connected to the right border directly Why No coil has been found in the last column Action delete the horizontal line insert a coil in the last column and connect the contact and the coil Error C112 coils can be connected only to the right border Why the last column contains an element that is not a coil Action delete the element and insert a coil Error C113 element become a non valid logic Why the program is not complete Action element from the left border should be connected to the right border Error C114 invalid address Why address inserted into the block is invalid Action check the address of the element that caused the error Error C115 block is not valid for the equipment with the specified firmware version Why block inserted into the program is not compatible with the equipment and firmware version Action erase block or check configured equipment Error C116 invalid USERFB parameter Why USERFB parameter is not valid or it is disabled Action check USERFB parameter inside of the USERFB that caused the error Error C117 invalid USERFB programming Why programming inside of the USERFB is not valid Action check program inside of the USERFB Error C118 word math is not allowed for this firmware
58. Windows 95 98 This bug is already fixed WLP V4 00 Online monitoring functions were implemented in this version These functions are Online Monitoring 78 view the states of the contacts and coils and values of the function blocks in the ladder editor Variables Monitoring 82 a dialog with variables monitoring Trend of Variables 84 a graphic with the values of the variables in real time J O Monitoring 88 a dialog that shows the states of the inputs and outputs Parameters Table 93 a dialog with options of saving or loading from a file upload and downlad the values to the PLC WLP V3 42 WLP V3 41 is only compatible with the firmware version V1 41 of PLC Now WLP is compatible with all firmware version up V1 30 of PLC WLP V3 41 Permit to the user select between english language or the portuguese language Implemented blocks FOLLOW 227 follow the speed of the master motor de according with the synchronous relation CAN2MS 278 send throw the CAN net the speed and position reference to the slave eg Overview 25 2 2 WLP V3 31 Access options to the system parameters P750 to P799 of the PLC 1 and access to the drive parameters in the source fields SRC and destination DST of the Transfer block have been inserted WLP V3 30 The WLP V3 30 is used for PLC1 board programming of the CFW 09 IMPORTANT It is not possible to compile projects of this version for the
59. a ENABLE DRIVE UW On MX On MX ATE EN TRANSFER ENO MY On SED Enable Drive FEEDBACE OF ENABLE DEIVE MX ATX EN TRANSFER ENO SED Enable Drive MY Enable SET SPEED OF DRIVE MX Pulse MX Pulse MX Pulse MX Enable MX ATE H EN SETSPEED ENO Clochaise ROTATION UW Velocidade M SPEED 120 0 4 ACCELERATION Feal HASIS FEEDBACE OF REAL SPEED MX ATX EN TRANSFER ENO SWD Real Speed HSRC OST MW Speed Figure Tutor5 representation with tags Ei Tutorial 337 0 l 3 4 5 T 2 a EM ABLE DRIVE Yo W800 ol X 2000 He eM S407 3 FEEDBACE OF ENABLE DRIVE M407 3 EN TRANSFER ENO SAD MSR OST M200 7 SET SPEED OF DRIVE ol 2001 vM 2001 g aM 200 SoM Z002 ol 407 i EN SETSPEED ENO Clockaise ROTATION 10 Yall WAD H SPEED 180 0 HM ACCELERATION Feal HASIS ll a FEEDBACE OF REAL SPEED ole 40 EN TRANSFER ENO feo WO HSRC OST E oM w O00 l4 Figure Tutor5 representation with addresses Functioning Drive enable The content of the P800 user parameter is used to activate the MX2000 bit marker in line 1 but in line 2 theMX2000 bitmarker content is transferred to the bitmarker of the SX0 system which is responsible for enabling the converter Then if the P800 parameter is zero the converter will be disabled and if it is one the converter will be enabled Drive enable re
60. a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments When the table is selected successfully the Done output goes to I during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 9 arguments which are MasterS Slave 118 126 Periodic 127 Busy 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Cam Table ID 126 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished successfully BLOCK ERRORS Error ae Ei 206 WLP V9 90 Invalid file of the CAM curve point table Invalid Cam Table Cam Table must be from 1 to 10 EXAMPLE 1 l 2 3 4 3 T 2 a ol 8000 ol S800 1 Execute MO CamTableSelect Done FastInput Real Feal Yab W I 3000 el W 13000 Hon Periodic H Periodic Busy Desabilitado FastInput 2 Error ErrorlC CamTablelD 3 a 8002 MM AS001 voll 8003 Execute MC Camin InSyne FastInput 5 Real CamTablelD Desabilitado i Desabilitado Command4borted Desabilitado Error Desabilitado ErrorlD Desabilitado 7 Butfermode EndOrProtile fr Desabilitado In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 8000 the MC_CamTableSelect block is executed thus point table 3 content of the word marker 13000 can be used by the MC_CamlIn block When t
61. added by activating the button Add Point or Insert Point or by giving a double click on the chart at the position the new point should be added The double click can be given on any area of the chart If there already was an interpolation at this area the editor will insert this point between the two interpolation points The point will be always added as interpolation of linear type When a point is added or inserted through the respective buttons the master and the slave values enter as zero In the case the point is inserted this can cause a profile interruption since the master position must always increase relating to the origin In this case the master and the slave value must be edited by clicking on their cells in the point table The figure below shows the insertion of a point through a double click MM CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt E i a ma Lauk sa ka a do A oa aa cece a a a a B E EEE oan ret a Haster Slave 526457 Speed 1 052314 Acceleration 0 000000 Jeik 0 000000 ajea P s a aa aea TUS Pa e n i F i i F E i i F F ane i i E F I F 1 i i F i I To change the interpolation type click on the type cell on the line that corresponds to the interpolation origin and select the desired one In the figure below a point has been changed to the cubic type of interpolation l Language 175 E CAM Edit lt tutor cpr D 0 63063
62. and the CommandAborted signal bit marker 6503 is set for I scan When the speed of 100 RPM is reached the InVelocity output of the second block bit marker 6509 is set Weg Language 227 7 9 4 7 5 4 1 and remains until the execution of another block Since the UpdateMode argument is configured as Online with the change of the value of float marker 9400 to 80 the speed immediately changes to 80 RPM without executing an acceleration deceleration ramp Gear Box FOLLOW SYMBOL EN FOLLOW ENO SLAVE MASTER DIRECTION ACCELERATION MODE SOURCE AAIS DESCRIPTION It is formed by I EN input I ENO output and 5 arguments being _ C 116 Acceleration 115 If 0 the acceleration is disabled Mode 227 Source 227 Axis 116 The EN input is responsible to keep the master sending position and speed data throw CAN net The ENO output informs if the CAN is enabled Synchronism Relation The synchronism relation is formed by a data type and two address or constants values depending on the chosen data type The data type may be constant user parameter work marker The address or constants values are destinate to master relation and slave relation Mode The mode is a constant It may be speed control only the speed synchronism position control the position and speed synchronism only to POS2 Source The sourse of sincronism is a constant It may be encoder
63. change the values of the configuration parameters it is possible to open again the configuration wizard as showed next For applications developed with the new methodology by means of the project tree 29 according to the next figure multil ldd x Ladder Diagrams multit Idd Configuration Wizards Hultibornbas Controle Fic Monitoring Dialogs Sistema kultbombas Controle Fisa Estado das Bombas Estado dos Comandos Estado do Multibombas Par metros CPW 1 Parametros Controle PID Par metros Modo Dormir e Despertar Par metros Entradas Anal gicas Far metros Falhas e Alarmes Par metros Ligar e Desligar BA Trend Variables Dialog Ajuste PIL tr Monitoring Yarnables Dialog Parameters Value Dialog Farametros Multibbombaz CF par Monitoring Inputs Outputs Dialog Monitoring Parameters by Heil 316 WLP V9 90 Weg 10 10 1 In order to execute the configuration wizard double click on the wizard name For applications developed with the old methodology by means of the Application option of the Tools menu click on Configure according to the next figure ieee Build Communicate User Block Window Help Parameter values F10 T Anvbus Fil a a ta eta Ea E i CANopen Shift F11 Application After the conclusion of the configuration wizard the transmission process Is initiated again for updating the performed changes as showed next New methodology WLP V 13 Alp
64. data Busy variable at FALSE level If so it sends the reading request of a number of registers indicated by NumberOfData in InitialDataAddress address using chosen function in Function and sets the Active output resetting them when receiving the response from the slave The received data is stored in the Value variable If the slave is not free the block waits Busy go to FALSE level to resubmit the m gt g Language 289 request NOTE If Execute goes to FALSE level and Busy is still at TRUE level the request is canceled NOTE Value is an array of number of bits NumberOfData multiplied by 16 That is if NumberOfData is 16 Value can be an array of 32 BYTE positions 16 WORD positions or 8 DWORD positions It is important to check this compatibility not to generate errors in the block When Execute has FALSE value Done remains FALSE The Done output is only activated when the block finishes executing successfully remaining at TRUE level until Execute receives FALSE If there is any error in the execution the Error output is enabled and ErrorlD displays an error code according to the table below HETTE 0 becusdsvecesstuly O Slave returned error Block Flowchart 290 WLP V9 90 Send read request according to Function Active TRUE Slave has answered or Timeout _ j Rising edge in Execute Done FALSE Execute TRUET Active FALSE
65. drive to the Disabled or Errorstop status ARGUMENTS It consists of 1 Execute input 1 InGear output and 13 arguments which are Master 118 Slave n RatioNumerator 11 RatioDenominator 118 Aceleration 119 Deceleration 119 Buffer Mode 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The InGear output informs the instant in which the synchronism is established OPERATING MODE When the MC_GearIn block is executed the drive does not operate in position grid In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Synchronized Motion BLOCK ERRORS Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another block is waiting Ei 232 WLP V9 90 P202 different from 4 PLC Invalid synchronism ratio Drive in the Homing status MC block not executed Internal fault EXAMPLE 1 2 3 4 5 7 g 9 M6504 Execute MC Gearln InGear FastInput FastInput Real Real 1 MRatiokumerator wkl 2 H RatioDenominatar i Tak 6502 1000 00 H Acceleration CommandAborted 206503 1000 00 Deceleration Error De abilitado ErrorlD fr Desabilitado Aborting MBufferklode T6509 Execube ML Gearln Inear FastInput Fas
66. eg Content 9 NANSEN 312 SONANS aan seussacteaneseccueethe 313 Parte IX Applications 313 t Applications inthe WLP sje 313 Parte X Tutorial 316 1 Generel nananana 316 2 Installing the WLP Software aasssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn mnnn 317 3 Executing the WLP Software Lusesek gresser naana aaa adaini 320 4 Creating a New Project nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnana 321 5 Editing a Ladder Programm Tutor1 assssnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 322 6 Monitoring a Ladder Program Tutor1 nnnnrernnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnn 332 7 Examples of User s Programs ennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnneennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 334 On Off via buttons Tutor2 and Tutor3 sscsscccsssiccscdvacssncsacincewstesatnadncaxaseevsssendscasacwonswisteussicasenwientssincaneeuesess 334 On Off via user s parameters TutoOr4 nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 335 Enable disable drive and control speed Tutor5 and Tutor6 rrrnnnnnunvvrnnnnnunvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnevevnnnnuneennnnnnuner 336 Relative positioning with s curve and t curve Tutor rrnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenennnenener 339 Absolut positioning with s curve and t curve Tutor8
67. eg Overview 17 WLP V8 40 Included V3 0X of SRWO1 RCD and SRWO1 PTC New functions USERERR 277 User error block to SRWO1 RCD V3 0X Higher and SRWO1 PTC V3 0X Higher Correction of V8 30 functional deviations Programmable parameters of SCA06 were not working properly Block IDATA in SCA06 was not working correctly for double marker In CFW700 in some situations the download does not work correctly WLP V8 30 New functions CAM creation of CAM 167 positioning profile for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 firmware versions 1 30 or higher Verify block compatibility 110 and data type 97 for more details Correction of V8 22 functional deviations Error while compiling USERFBs for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 MC_PHASING 235 block PhaseShift argument was truncating the value when configured as constant In the USERFB it was not releasing parameters PM for the encoder counter reset Error in the project conversions from wlp 8 00 to 1 20 1 30 and 1 70 CFW11 firmware versions SCA06 MATH block was not correctly enabling the tag button for double markers It released double marker in the IDATA for equipments different from the SCA06 It released the double option in the USERFB configuration for equipments different from the SCA06 The parameter value window did not indicate the correct project pass when saving a file WLP V8 22 Version to correction of WSCAN V1 80 functional deviations WLP V8 21 Correction of V8 20
68. functional deviations Fixed the table parameters for the CFW11 In PLC11 02 analog inputs and outputs were not allowed in the TRANSFER block WLP V8 20 New supported equipment SCA06 Verify block compatibility 110 and data type 97 for more details New function blocks for the SCA06 MC_Power Real axis enabling MC_Reset Fault reset MC_Stop Stop execution MW_IqControl Iq control MC_MoveAbsolute Absolute positioning MC MoveRelative Relative positioning 18 Ei WLP V9 90 MC StepAbsSwitch Search of zero switch MC StepLimitSwitch Search of limit switch MC StepRefPulse Search of reference pulse MC StepDirect Axis position value change MC FinishHoming Axis status change MC Move Velocity Speed movement MC Gearln Speed synchronism MC GearInPos Synchronism in position MC Phasing Axis shift execution MC GearOQut Finalize synchronism WLP V8 00 New supported equipment PLC11 02 SRWO1 RCD Verify block compatibility 110 and data type 97 for more details New functions The MMC 307 block for the SSW06 was added one block per ladder and only with the SSW06 optional IOS6 board The CANopen Follow 227 block for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 was added Support to Spanish language for SRWO1 PTC and SRWO1 RCD Modifications The equipment SRWO1 was changed to SRWO1 PTC Verify block compatibility 110 and data typ
69. in execution an error will occur and the Error signal bit marker 6509 will be set and the word marker 8400 will contain the value of error 52 The HMI will show the alarm A00052 When the positioning of 10 revolutions is reached the first block is concluded thus the Busy and Active signals of this block are reset and the Done output bit marker 6504 is set to 1 scan With a new transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6505 the second MC MoveAbsolute block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the 126 WLP V9 90 Weg positioning for position 15 revolutions starts When the position 15 revolutions is reached the Done output of the second block bit marker 6510 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 are reset The Done output remains in 1 while the Execute input bit marker 6505 is set UPDATE MODE Used in the MC blocks Movement Control This argument determines whether the maximum speed of the movement will be updated or not during its execution The Update Mode is always constant and can be RISING e ONLINE RISING The maximum speed value is obtained when activating the block in the transition from 0 to I of the Execute signal of the block ONLINE The maximum speed value can be changed during the movement of the block CAM TABLE Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Cam
70. is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 are reset The Done output Weg Language 193 remains in 1 while the Execute input bit marker 6505 is set Second block canceling the first block 2HMX6500 toO CU y O vo MX6501 i C ee S _ ee D a vo MX 6504 11 1 gt TH MX6505 1 l p p THMXGS08 11 1 gt TH MXGS09 1 Veloeid 200 Vo MA6506 04 MN6307 de 100 Fosic o 11 2 In the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 the first MC MoverRelative block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the positioning for 10 revolutions starts With the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6505 the second MC MoverRelative block is instantly executed BufferMode Aborting thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the positioning for 5 revolutions starts At the same time the Busy and Active signals of the first block bit markers 6501 and 6502 are reset and the CommandAborted signal bit marker 6503 is set for I scan 194 WLP V9 90 WE When the positioning of 5 revolutions finishes the Done output of the second block bit marker 6509 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 are reset The Done output remains in 1 while the Execute
71. of the PLC11 01 WLP V7 14 Beta New blocks REF 220 Send speed reference or the torque current reference for the drive CALCCAM 180 Calculate CAM For more details verify the block compatibility 1101 New functions x 72 General Information Online 72 CFW11 the USERERR 277 and RTC 246 blocks for use in the ladder were released Correction of VB7 13 functional deviations Error message when creating new USERFB Conversion of equipment to sat block did not work for markers that were not float When creating a project with a name that contained the text was erased from the character on and a project was created sometimes overwriting projects Error message was inserted for when the SSW06 program is gt 1024 bytes System marker monitoring generated error 20 WLP V9 90 Weg Modbus upload function via serial was corrected SSW 06 decompiler sometimes did not work USB error messages were simplified A method was created to prevent illegal operations accessing monitoring dialogs which sometimes occurred because a monitoring thread had not been completely finished Error when creating marker description with Tag text wlp understood that it was a tag definition again USERFB parameter does not work at the output of the dmux block to the PLC11 USERFB block fieldbus configuration in the same PLC11 project blocks the card Dmux does not all
72. output analog input user parameter system parameter drive parameter DST Destaination Data ENO tek 1000 ol LOO M100 M1003 M1004 M1005 M1006 M1007 M1008 M1009 M1010 MX 1011 oA LOLS MA 1013 olf 1014 M1015 273 al A200 274 WLP V9 90 Weg E The destination data is formed by data type and an address and it is the local where will be stored the source data value The destination data type may be bit marker word marker float marker system marker digital output analog output user parameter system parameter drive parameter NOTE In the option User Parameter the current value is not saved in the E2APROM memory 1 e the last value is not restored OPERATION The ENO output goes I when the transfer is done In most cases it is done immediately unless a driver parameter has been chosen as the source or destination When the EN input is active the value contained in the source data is transferred to the destination data Otherwise no operation is realized Please consider the compatibility of the source data type and the destination data type EXAMPLE LX E2000 EN TRANSFER ENO The digital input 1 set to 1 enables the TRANSFER Thus the value contained in the analog input 1 is shown at the user parameter 800 EN TRANSFER ENG An useful application of the TRANSFER block is to enable the motor for instance through a digital i
73. started and when this command is enabled Exit ACCESS Menu Project Exit Hot Key Alt F4 FUNCTION It closes the application Edit Undo ACCESS Menu Edit Undo Hot Key Ctrl Z Standard Toolbar 2 FUNCTION The last executed action is undone DESCRIPTION Only 10 actions can be undone 36 WLP V9 90 Ei 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 Redo ACCESS Menu Edit Redo Hot Key Ctrl Y Ta Standard Toolbar FUNCTION The last undo executed is redo DESCRIPTION Up to 10 actions can be redone This command remains disabled if there are no redo to be done Cut ACCESS Menu Edit Cut Hot Key Ctrl X Standard Toolbar amp FUNCTION It copies selected cells to a transfer area and deletes them DESCRIPTION This command is only enabled when any cell has been selected 75 Copy ACCESS Menu Edit Copy Hot Key Ctrl C Br Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Copies selected cells to the clipboard DESCRIPTION This command is only enabled when cells have been selected 75 Paste ACCESS Menu Edit Paste Hot Key Ctrl V Standard Toolbar eB FUNCTION Makes a copy of the data from the transfer area to the Editor DESCRIPTION This command only is enabled if there are data in the transfer area i e after a copy 36 has been executed or cut 36 command IT Eq Menus 37 3 2 6 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 4
74. status of the ladder program Press the online monitoring key again for disabling this function Please find below the graphic presentation of the logic status of coil and contacts during online monitoring NORMAL OPEN NO CONTACT CLOSED NORMAL OPEN NO CONTACT OPEN NORMAL CLOSED NC CONTACT CLOSED NORMAL CLOSED NC CONTACT OPEN as COIL ACTIVATED Weg Monitoring 79 seer COIL DEACTIVATED NEGATED COIL DEACTIVATED am NEGETAED COIL DEACTIVATED als SET COIL ACTIVATED E SET COIL DEACTIVATED R RESET COIL ACTIVATED R RESET COIL DEACTIVATED AE POSITIVE TRANSITION COIL ACTIVATED P POSITIVE TRANSITION COIL DEACTIVATED N NEGATIVE TRANSITION COIL ACTIVATED N NEGATIVE TRANSITION COIL DEACTIVATED NOTE The language to describe the Ladder operation does a comparison to an electric circuit with contactors and their respective contacts When a contact in the ladder is mentioned as being conducting it refers to its capability of being giving continuity logic sequence to the next program phase In the same way an energized coil has its contacts in the program logic Normally Open NO conducting Normally Closed NC not conducting Next an example of ladder online monitoring using 4 digital inputs each one represented by a NO or NC contact and 4 coils 80 WLP V9 90 eg 1 l 2 3 4 a T 5 J vaal ae l He 2 vo
75. testing the serial communication If there is no problem in communication represented in next figure it will be displayed on the program s status bar located at the lower part of WLP Serial port 1 open successful Figure Status of on line monitoring This bar has a LED type indicator in the blue color It flashes indicating that the communicationis in progress If any communication fail occurs a message box will be displayed with the fail information anda possible solution Once monitoring is activated all edition tools will be deactivated and the edition window willdisplay the logic status of the program in ladder To deactivate on line monitoring just press the on line monitoring button again Next the graphic representation of the logic status for contacts and coils in on line monitoring will be described a NORMAL OPEN NO CONTACT CLOSED NORMAL OPEN NO CONTACT OPEN I xnormar CLOSED NC CONTACT CLOSED NORMAL CLOSED NC CONTACT OPEN is COIL ACTIVATED am COIL DEACTIVATED NEGATED COIL DEACTIVATED ad mn NEGETAED COIL DEACTIVATED 5 SET COIL ACTIVATED 5 SET COIL DEACTIVATED ma R RESET COIL ACTIVATED Weg Tutorial 333 R RESET COIL DEACTIVATED F POSITIVE TRANSITION COIL ACTIVATED P POSITIVE TRANSITION COIL DEACTIVATED N NEGATIVE TRANSITION COIL ACTIVATED N NEGATIVE TRANSITION COIL DEACTIVATED In the next screen the on line
76. the digital input must be in accordance with the LimitSwitchMode argument and the Direction argument according to the table below Limit Switch Mode Digital Input Function MC Positive MC EdgeOn Limit switch clockwise active high option 12 MC EdgeOff Limit switch clockwise active low option 13 MC Negative MC EdgeOn Limit switch counterclockwise active high option 14 MC Negative MC EdgeOff Limit switch counterclockwise active low option 15 It will be considered LitmSwitch the first digital input configured according to the table from digital input 1 If no digital inputs are configured according to LimitSwitchMode and Direction error 77 in the block will occur and it will not be executed 198 WLP V9 90 Weg The search will be executed with the speed configured in the Velocity argument and an acceleration deceleration configured in the Standard Profile With the execution of the MC_StepLimitSwitch block the user s reference position P0052 and P0053 is not changed When the search finishes the Done output goes to 1 during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 10 arguments which are E I S e l 119 Velocity 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output inform
77. the Project Tree 291 Grid ACCESS Menu View Grid Hot Key Ctrl Shift G Standard Toolbar dt FUNCTION Shows or hides the Grid Tag Address ACCESS Menu View Tag Address Hot Key Ctrl Shift T Standard Toolbar Al FUNCTION It shows the tag or the element address IT Eq Menus 39 3 3 10 Compilation errors ACCESS Menu View View Compilation Errors Hot Key Ctrl E ERR Standard Toolbar E FUNCTION Shows the errors of the last compilation 3 3 11 Searching errors ACCESS Menu View Errors Search Hot Key Ctrl L E Standard Toolbar K FUNCTION Shows the cell where occurred an error during the last compilation 3 3 12 Compilation Info ACCESS Menu View Compilation Information Hot Key Ctrl I ER Standard Toolbar E FUNCTION Shows the information about de last compilation 3 3 13 Address table ACCESS Menu View Address table Hot Key Ctrl T Standard Toolbar El FUNCTION It shows all existing addresses data types tags and description of the current project It also permits to search the address that has been selected to insert a new address and exclude the address that has been selected 3 3 14 User parameter table ACCESS Menu View User Parameter Table Hot Key Ctrl T Standard Toolbar ir FUNCTION It displays all parameters of the current project that may be programmed by the user 40 WLP V9 90 Ei 3
78. to 0 Note If a stop is done in the HOME block it will be always cancelled even if programmed as feed enable Important This block does not change the control way despite if it is in position loop or in speed loop FLOWCHART 148 WLP V9 90 Ei N was there one previous positioning run stop Is feed enable mode restore positioning N stopped Y finish the positioning E NO CHART Kill Motion Mode END Weg Language 149 STOP KILL MOTION 4 SPEED MINIMUM 4 SCAN CYCLE lt 4 SCAN CYCLE Please note that in this case after the EN input returns to 0 a S Curve is started since this S Curve was being executed before the stop command was given Feed Enable Mode EN STOP FEED ENABLE ENO CONTINUE THE PREVIOUS MOVEMENT 1 SCAN CYCLE EXAMPLE 150 WLP V9 90 Weg LX oh X 2000 EN TCURME ENO P Positivo H SIGN POSITION 100 00 M POSITION ol W800 SPEED 10000 0 H ACCELERATION Felativo H MODE Feal HASIS valia ae TON 60000 0 Interrompe Autom tico Feal When the digital input I is 1 a positioning of 100 revolutions is enabled When the digital input 2 is 1 the stop block is enabled causing the positioning interruption After stopping the digital output 1 of the drive I goes during one scan cycle As soon as the digital input 2 returns to 0 the posit
79. to I in the Execute input the block will be executed and the user s reference position P0052 and P0053 is changed to the SetPosition argument value The Done output goes to during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 5 arguments which are Axis 18 Error 128 Error Id 128 m gt g Language 203 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished OPERATING MODE In the execution of the block if the shaft status is Homing the shaft status will change to StandStill otherwise it will remain in the current status BLOCK ERRORS Error P202 different from 4 PLC State of the Drive different from Standstill or Homing EXAMPLE 0 l 2 3 4 5 T 5 9 al 6500 ol S650 1 T Execute ML StepAbsSwitch Done Real Feal l MC SantchNegatrve H Direction Desabilitado MC EdseOn MSvwitchMode i Desabilitado 100 00 W velocity Command 4borted He Desabilitado 4 Error fr Desabilitado ErrorlD fe Desabilitado 3 vMi wM E6502 Execute MC StepDirect Done Real 5 3 500000 H SetPosition 6 Desabilitado Desabilitado q G I onfor AbsSwitch iG on for iLimitSwitches om f om case 1 se case 2 In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6500 the MC_StepAbsSwitch
80. to open in the Project List and press the button Open Project or double click the project with the left mouse button Note In the WLP initialization do the same as described before Save ACCESS Menu Project Save Hot Key Ctrl S Standard Toolbar a FUNCTION Saves current project Weg Menus 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 7 33 Save As ACCESS Menu Projet Save As Hot Key Ctrl Shift S FUNCTION Saves the current project with another name DESCRIPTION Enter a new name for the current project If the chosen name is valid the project will be open after conformation with OK button If Cancel button is activated the project is interrupted and dialog box is closed Save All ACCESS Menu Project Save All Hot Key Ctrl Alt S FUNCTION Save all projects opened Close ACCESS Menu Project Close Hotkey Ctrl F4 Standard Toolbar a FUNCTION Close the current project Remove ACCESS Menu Project Remove Hot Key Alt Del FUNCTION Deletes the selected project DESCRIPTION Select one of the projects of the existing project list and press button Remove Project and confirm its deleting Print ACCESS Menu Project Print Hot Key Ctrl P Standard Toolbar FUNCTION 34 Ei WLP V9 90 3 1 10 3 1 11 3 1 12 Prints the active project Print Preview ACCESS Menu Project Print Preview Hot Key Ctrl W Standard Toolbar fl FUN
81. value is not restored In addition the even values correspond to 0 or false and the odd ones correspond to I ot true OPERATION When there is a transition from I to 0 at the input signal the argument is set for one scan cycle Then the argument is reset even if its input remains at 0 CHART i NEGATIVE TRANSITION SENSING COIL pul 1SCANCYCLE SAMPLE When the digital input I commutates from to 0 writes for I scan cycle into the bit marker 2000 IMMEDIATE COIL SYMBOL 1H DESCRIPTION Consists of I input and I argument The argument consists of one data type and one address 138 WLP V9 90 Weg The argument data type may be digital output OPERATION It transfer the signal contained in its input to the programmed digital output The writing on the digital output occurs at the moment of execution of the instruction unlike the normal coil where the writing on the digital outputs occurs only at the end of the scan cycle CHART P COIL OUT 7 5 Function Blocks 7 5 1 Controle de Movimento 7 5 1 1 MC Power SYMBOL Enable ML Power Status Buffer lode DESCRIPTION Enable Disable the real shaft The command enable disable the real shaft will be according to the Enable input If Enable is 0 the command will be disable and if it is 1 the command will be enable When the MC_Power block is used to enable disable the real shaft no digital inputs must be programmed for
82. with constant word marker user parameter RATIO DENOMINATOR This argument will be the denominator of the synchronism ratio of the GearIn and GearInPos blocks Its value is without signal and must be different from zero The RatioDenominator argument can be programmed with constant word marker user parameter POSITION DISTANCE SET POSITION PHASE SHIFT Used in the MC blocks Movement Control This argument can be programmed with a constant value or by means of a double marker Weg Language 119 The value must be programmed in revolutions EXAMPLE 10 5 revolutions 2 125 revolutions and 0 025 revolution VELOCITY Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The speed can be programmed with a constant value or by means of a float marker The value must be programmed in RPM revolutions per minute The maximum allowed value is 10 000 RPM In the MC_MoveVelocity block the speed value signal will be the movement direction positive clockwise and negative counterclockwise in the other blocks only positive values will be accepted ACCELERATION DECELERATION Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The acceleration deceleration can be programmed with a constant value or by means of a float marker The value must be programmed in RPM s revolutions per minute per second The maximum allowed value is 500 000 RPM s Only positive values will be accepted JERK Used in the MC blocks Moveme
83. 0 0000000e 000 SMF Float Marker 001 0 0000 10 1000 O 0044444 0 0044444 PROPERTIES BOX OF THE CAM BLOCK Language 171 Profile tow Oper Create Save r Remove Cam Profile Type C Calculable Masimun Number of Points Constant First Master Point Float Marker First Slave Point Float Marker First Curve Type Bit Marker Number of Points MW Marcadorde Word vf e000 We Retentve Mord Marker 6000 6099 We Volatile Word Marker 7000 7649 Cancel Help This box is called by giving a double click on the CAM block In this box you can execute following operations Select the profile used though the Profile selection Open the profile for editing though the button Open Create a new profile through the button Create Remove the profile selected through the button Remove Save with other name the profile selected through the button Save as Creating a new CAM profile For creating a new Cam profile click on the button Create An input box will ask you for the new profile name After the cam profile editor will open as shown below 172 WLP V9 90 Weg E CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt There are following control in this window Point table Add points to the point table Insert points mthe point table Remove points from the pout table ai Mestre rot Escravo rot ob SJ
84. 00 Correction of V8 60 functional deviations Solved the problem in setting languages for Windows Vista and Windows 7 that do not load correctly the data of the language Solve the problem that WLP load the wrong menu when the Ladder project is openned loading the language of the Windows Not descompile PLC 01 V1 4X and PLC11 02 V1 4X because WLP was identifying a wrong version Not descompile CAM and CALCAM blocks for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 Uploading of wizards values of configuration do not read negative values of words Descompiler of user program parameters had problems with negative values of the minimum and maximum values and the decimal digits Configuration of the tags of MUX and DMUX blocks were not possible because the tag button used wrong markers addresses WLP V8 60 Included V1 1X of SCA06 100 compatible with Windows Vista and Windows 7 32 and 64bit New blocks SCA06 MC CamTableSelect 205 MW CamCalc 206 MC Camln 209 MC CamOut 212 New functions CANopen master for SCA06 according WSCAN V2 00 Tool Cam Profiles 58 for SCA06 utilized for managing the CAM profiles of equipment WLP V8 41 Modifications For the CFW700 V1 03 the compiler blocks programs with size superior to 5986 bytes Correction of V8 40 functional deviations For SCA06 when the inputs of MUX block were disabled in some situations the boolean value read and transfered to output was I
85. 1 Delete Element Lana 41 COMMON a E E EE EEEE 42 Come 42 PON ON a EEE EE EE NN EE faa eaeeeiee eed 42 VE Geese sca vcsncsae E coasts cungunecinnen send aoeace cious sacar aee aie ven donee selrsenseeeaoauauneasedaaisce 42 COTA CES EE EE EE AAE AARS 43 NON Siteeeeene new re Dee tnne ere etre ee Ene EP ee Pte POO E Re en een ne ee oe ete ee 43 ETT 43 GOIS NN 43 OLE 43 EU 43 EV 44 RESET pene re eee er eer reo Ee Re Prt ere Pe ee eT UTE on er net ne Cee ene ere eee ee eee 44 PE 44 SG EEE EEE NENNE A 44 MEPMES Lue nT eo et NE Tne pa er Une emer NEA 45 Function Blocks sicccccaicociccccesccseccotsnacstcestasscecsncunceacuassecdnsazacseteedsacdetsctuniach suis euavienansteasecedtecuvacscdsccssasecsssncensiecsns 45 M T 45 TOP 45 TR NN 45 POSTIO NO eE E E one beedanseeceececee 45 FAN 46 UME hp 46 TRE eee ne re fe rr et eee RE ae E A en OR Pree ee eee Rey enn oe nen De 46 FOME ee 46 TUR NNN 46 CAN ERE EE EE ER 47 MENN 47 FET 47 ME TESE 48 MO 0 EEE EEE EE NE EE 48 MEAN 48 ENN 48 MON 49 ETP hj rs ees ce occ sees ET ete ed ve sae E ER 49 EE 49 PEEL NN 49 Copyright O 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved Ei Content 5 RER 49 CE BON EE EE NE 50 FUN es as ls A nsec eee va ea eee ses seinen bag doses E se tee enema eee 50 V EEE EE EE eee ee 50 POL 50 NE 50 51 TONN 51 TN 51 U EE EN ene 51 ape es tects es etree EN NE EE EV 51 FLER NN 52 TEN as casceatin aes E ster samo ns emcee ce dgos ep seen easeic
86. 1 0 660010 a a a a a a a a a a a a Master Slave 0540027 Speed 1 037624 Acceleration 5 839700 Jerk 31 613372 Er Now you can note other values in this curve beside the position such as speed acceleration and Jerk For better viewing of all values you can use the button Fit to Screen as shown below CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt ee In the same way we can select one of the values and use the button Apply selected Zoom In the example below a zoom has been given for the speed Ei 176 WLP V9 90 CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt E mep m me gree ee i i Serra prrresg tg rest reqs k E E Lt i Firrrqiursrrru Another important tool to be mentioned is the cursor In the example below the cursor is positioned on the point of the maximum speed CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt 1 Tur ee mi rsJrus s rer qs iT SSP reper i GE EET B i E E m E E B i Please consider that the speed acceleration and slave jerk values depend on the master speed Thus we recommend changing them in order to simulate them very near the effective values In the figure below the master speed will be changed to 1000 rpm and we will analyze the cursor at the same position Weg Language 177 Master Speed 1000 rpm Cursor Values Master 60312516 rot Slave 03275858 rot Speed
87. 1576 751405 rpm Acceleration 88519 822218 rpm Jerk 31619871813 905342 PMS During the cam profile design all these values must be considered since they may or not be executed due to the mechanical electroelectronic limits of the installed equipment As the acceleration and the jerk charts are determined by considering the interpolation between two points at the junctions between the linear interpolations the acceleration and jerk will be displayed as zero However theoretically it is known that in a speed step the acceleration and jerk is infinitely variable In the practice the acceleration and jerk depends at this moment on the mechanical electrical and electronic limitations of the involved equipment These speed steps should be noted and considered in the cam profile design Figure below shows the condition as example CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt ee 0 E i200 000000 0 000000 og a9 Ll 0000000 alela Pls Ali s a i I I Li i i I I 1 i i i I 1 i i I I Li i i I pa Li i I I I i i i I I Li i I 1 E E i ee q Bn ee de p Z E i i m o The CAM block has two different interpolation types the linear and the cubic Following equations are used Linear m PE _ PE Vy pim pim p in pim 178 WLP V9 90 Ei je 0 Cubic p atlpm pim b pm pir C e l pm pimi pie ve tat om pimi 4275 pr
88. 2 31 Included CFW 701 V2 04 and V2 05 WLP V9 82 New Functions Included SRWO1 PTC V6 02 Included SRWO1 RCD V6 02 Included CFW11 Ve5 42 Ve45 11 Ve55 10 e Ve75 10 WLP V9 81 New Functions Included CFW 100 V2 30 which was added an analog QW 1 and four digital inputs IX5 IX8 Included CFW 700 v2 04 Improvements Closing mechanism of the monitoring dialogs was changed to accelerate the closing process of dialogs in low speed communication systems Corrections Error on ladder compilation of the CVW300 version Vel1 10 causing incompatibility when running in firmware Error on ladder compilation of the SCA06 version V3 19 and V3 20 causing incompatibility when running in firmware WLP V9 80 New Functions CVW300 V1 20 or higher CAN Configurator eg Overview 11 CFW500 Vel1 52 e Ve21 52 SRAMP and STOP blocks New versions of CFW 11 CFW 100 CFW500 CFW700 CFW701 CVW300 SCA06 SSW7000 SRWOI PTC SRWO1 RCD Corrections SDO Block of SCA06 do not worket odd retentive markers on the outputs of the block Download dialog has fail not responding for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 IDATA function block not allow network markers RW WW RB and WB for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 Changes in the new Pump Genius Multiplex application version 2 02 Compiled the Pump Genius Multiplex Control application for the CFW 11 Ve5 31 Functional deviati
89. 20 are tables of variable points In order to use the tables 11 to 20 first the MC CamCalc block must be executed with the desired table and after the MC Camln block For the SCA06 equipment it is allowed programming at most 200 fixed points and 100 variable points seeing that the maximum number of variable points of each table must be configured in the Max Points Cam Type Fired Fired Fired Fired Fired Fired Fired Fired Fired Fired Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable brir Salvar Como Remover OK Cancelar Ajuda DESCRIPTION column as shown below Cam File Caml able CamT able Caml ables CamT abled Cam ableb Cam ablet Caml able Cam abled Cam abled CamT able10 Mas Points 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ei Menus 59 Perfil Cam Table Cam Type Cam File Maz Points Fired Caml able Fired CamT able Fired Caml ables Fired CamT abled Fired Cam ableb Fired Cam ableb Fired Caml able Fired Cam abled Fired Cam abled Fired Cam able10 Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable Calculable moo 9 oO F 0 Mi mo O A O A A A Oooo brir Salvar Como Remover OK Cancelar Ajuda In order to edit the cam table click on the Edit
90. 3 255 258 L Posicionamento 46 POSITIONO 45 151 Positioning 46 47 153 156 159 165 167 180 Ladder 96 97 104 110 114 129 130 131 132 183 133 134 135 136 137 146 150 151 153 156 Print 33 34 159 165 167 180 183 213 216 218 220 227 228 239 241 243 246 247 250 253 255 258 Problems 355 260 261 268 269 270 272 273 274 275 276 Project 28 29 32 33 34 35 313 321 277 278 279 294 307 308 Projet 33 Language 35 96 97 104 110 114 129 Proprieties 34 Markers 104 QSTOP 45 150 MATH 53 261 MC _Camin 209 g R E MC CamOut 212 MC CamlableSelect 205 Redo 36 MMC 5 7 307 REF 49 220 Monitoring 70 71 72 77 78 81 82 84 88 90 Reference 129 91 93 332 Remove 33 Movement 49 213 216 218 220 RTC 51 246 MSCANWEG 55 278 RXCANWEG _ 56 279 MUX 54 270 MW_CamCalc 206 mi S N SAT 53 269 Save 32 33 New 32 SCURVE 46 153 News 10 SDO 56 279 Search 37 Seleciona Tabela Cam 205 Copyright 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved 360 WLP V9 90 Select 41 Verify 50 239 241 Serial 94 View 37 38 39 SETSPEED 49 213 SHIFT 47 183 i W Solutions 355 SPEED 49 218 What is WLP 25 Stop 45 146 150 Window 74 Support 357 WLP 10 25 26 27 28 74 System 104 Tag 38 TCURVAR 46 165 TCURVE 46 156 TON 51 243 Tools 57 68 TRANSFER 54 273 Transference 54 55 273 274 275 276 277 Trend 71 84 Tutor 322 332 Tutor10 348 Tuto
91. 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 Page Insert before ACCESS Menu Page Insert Before Hot Key Ctrl B Standard Toolbar Es FUNCTION Inserts a page before the current page DESCRIPTION This command will be disabled if the project already has 255 pages Inserte after ACCESS Menu Page Insert After Hot Key Ctrl A Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a page after the current page DESCRIPTION This command will be disabled if the project already has 255 pages Delete ACCESS Menu Page Delete Hot Key Ctrl Del Standard Toolbar ES FUNCTION Deletes current page DESCRIPTION This command will be enabled only if the project has more than I page Previous ACCESS Menu Page Previous Hot Key Page Up Standard Toolbar ti FUNCTION Goes to the previous page in the current project Weg Menus 41 3 4 5 Next ACCESS Menu Page Next Hot Key Page Down Standard Toolbar FUNCTION It skips to the next page DESCRIPTION This command is only disabled if the current page is the last page of the project 3 4 6 Goto ACCESS Menu Page Go To Hot Key Ctrl G Standard Toolbar ty FUNCTION Goes to the chosen page DESCRIPTION This command will open a dialog box where it is possible to choose the wished page define a name for the page and also a comment for the page 3 5 Insert 3 5 1 Select ACCESS Menu Insert Select Hot Key ESC Standard Toolbar wl
92. 68 0 32767 gt 3000 0 3000 Formula Result AI 3000 32767 vok I O00 ob X 1 OOS ol I ODA 268 WLP V9 90 en 7 5 7 3 FUNC SYMBOL EN FUNC ENO IN OUT FUNCTION DESCRIPTION This block is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 3 types of arguments as follows format function values 117 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output is a copy of the value of the EN input As all data type of this block are float constant or float marker we recommend to use the blocks INT2FL and FL2INT in order to make the right conversions Format The format is always constant and it can be integer or float pointing Function The function is always constant For the float pointing format the following options are available absolute module negative sqare root sine cosine tangent sine arc cosine arc tangent arc sine arc cosine arc tangent arc exponential In log 10 frac trunc round For the integer format the following options are available absolute module negative NOTE To the trigonometric functions the angle unit is radian OPERATION The EN input transfers always its value to the ENO output The block is executed while the EN input is 1 m P g Language 269 EXAMPLE IX HME MX2001 MX2000 EN INT2FL ENO INT FLOAT FRAC hi states atl SU
93. 9 C CALCCAM 47 180 Calcula Nova Tabela Cam 206 Calculation 52 53 54 260 261 268 269 270 2 2 CAM 47 167 180 Cam Profiles 58 CAN 55 56 278 279 CANOpen 56 57 279 Cells 75 76 77 CFW 11 95 Close 33 Coil 43 44 45 132 133 134 135 136 137 Colar 36 Comment 42 130 Communicate 69 70 71 72 94 95 COMP 52 260 Compatibility 110 Compilation 39 68 69 309 310 312 313 Configuration 72 Connection 42 Contact 43 131 Copy 36 Copyright 356 CTENC 52 255 258 CTU 51 247 Cut 36 Ls D mn Data 97 Delete 40 41 DMUX 54 272 Download 69 Ba Edit 35 36 37 75 76 77 Editing 322 Errors 39 Executa curva Cam 209 Executing 320 Exibir 38 Exit 35 a ee Fieldbus 57 FILTER 52 253 Finaliza MC_Camin 212 FL2INT 54 275 FOLLOW 50 227 Force 72 91 FUNC 53 268 Gear Box 50 227 228 Grid 38 Help 74 HMI 72 90 HOME 46 159 IDATA 55 276 Immediate 137 INBWG 50 241 Copyright 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved Index 359 Information 25 72 93 O Initialization 26 INPOS 50 239 Inputs 71 72 88 91 Online 93 Inserir 45 46 57 Open 32 Insert 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 50 51 52 53 54 Outputs 71 72 88 91 55 56 Insert Page 40 E P Installation 26 95 317 INT2FL 55 274 Page 40 41 Introduction 27 Parada 45 J Parameters 39 57 72 90 93 Perfil Cam 58 PID 51 250 JOG 49 216 PLC 51 52 243 246 247 250 25
94. ALSE The Done output is only activated when the block finishes executing successfully remaining at TRUE level until Execute receives FALSE If there is any error in the execution the Error output is enabled and ErrorlD displays an error code according to the table below Executed successfully Invalid input data Timeout in slave response Slave returned error Block Flowchart Master not enabled Ei Language 287 Rising edge in Execute Done FALSE Error FALSE ErrorlO 0 Done TRUE Example Execute TRUE Error TRUE Send write request according to Function Active TRUE Slave has answered or Timeout Active FALSE Update ErrorlD Done FALSE 288 WLP V9 90 Weg Execute ME WriteBinary Done SlaveAddress Function InitialDataAddress ph SV 8200 H MumberOfData AM WSZ01 100 AH Timeout FALSE H Offset SALDT6103 H Value 7 5 10 4 MB_ReadRegister Block that performs a reading of up to sixteen 16 bit registers via Read Holding Registers or Read Input Registers of a slave on the Modbus RTU network Execute ME ReadRegister SlaveAddress Function InitialDataSddress MumberOrOata Timeout Offset Block Structure Name Description OO Operation When this block detects a leading edge on Execute it checks whether the Modbus RTU slave in specified address in SlaveAddress is free to send
95. B and transferring it to the board under use we will have the following situations Situation 1 Even if the USERFB input ON is true the output OUT remains off since the USERFB block is disabled IX1 is off Ei Language 303 TX m g Er LAR OM OUT i Ka vo OFF D Situation 2 When the USERFB is enabled IX1 is on the output OUT is off since the input ON is false wal NEI f Zl Jer er ee ole ON OOT ee Ka EN OFF Situation 3 When the USERFB is enabled IX1 is on and the input ON is true the output OUT is turned on 304 WLP V9 90 Weg El vo l gr ola ON OUT es a ole OFF At this moment it is possible to monitor the internal operation of the USERFB In order to do so disable the on line monitoring of the main program open the USERFB and then reactivate the on line monitoring oF MU oF DN oF DIG oF MLS Note The on line monitoring of a USERFB is performed by reading the USERFB parameters Every time a USERFB is called the USERFB parameters share the same internal memory area of the board Therefore the values of the USERFB parameters that were monitored coincide with the last USERFB block call performed by the main program Hence we recommend for USERFB depuration purposes to use only one USERFB call on the main program because in this way the monitoring will indicate the real behavior of the USERFB under que
96. C Camln Edit toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a MC Camln 209 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 11 MC CamOut ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning MC CamOut Edit toobar FUNCTION Inserts a MC CamOut 212 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written IT Eq Menus 49 on the status bar 3 5 7 3 Movement 3 5 7 3 1 SETSPEED ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Movement Set Speed Standard Toolbar Is FUNCTION Inserts a Set Speed 213 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 3 2 JOG ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Movement JOG Standard Toolbar gt FUNCTION Inserts a Jog 216 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the sym
97. CTION Shows how the project will be printed Print Setup ACCESS Menu Project Print Setup Hot Key Ctrl U FUNCTION Changes the printer configurations and printing options Units ACCESS Menu Project Units Hot Key Alt U FUNCTION It allows the user to define the units for positioning speed acceleration and jerk when the values are constants Proprieties ACCESS Menu Project Properties Hot Key Alt P FUNCTION It permits selecting the equipment and the respective firmware version that will be used in the project Project Properties E quipament CPw 11 Y Firmware Version 1 00 W Enable Upload Password Project Author Author IT Eq Menus 35 3 1 13 3 1 14 3 1 15 3 2 3 2 1 In this dialog is possible to define upload password for SoftPLC of the CFW 11 PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 DESCRIPTION After the equipment and the respective firmware version have been selected the WLP disables and or disables the commands available in the selected firmware version Language ACCESS Menu Project Language FUNCTION Allow the user to select between portuguese or english languages However this change is only update after the user exits from the application and open it again Load the last Project during initialization ACCESS Menu Project Load the Last Project during initialization FUNCTION It opens the last project that is used automatically when the WLP is
98. Dictionary Node gt Manufacturer Profile Area Sublds Mame Value Data Min Max Acess Default 2000 POOO Parameter Access 0 P004 DC Voltage INTE Ox0000 0803E7 ro 2002 POO Motor Speed 2003 FOOF Motor Current 2004 POO4 OC Voltage 2006 POOB Seryodrive Status 200C POT Digital Input Status 200E PO14 Last Fault 200F F015 Second Previous Fault 2010 PO16 Third Previous Fault 2011 POV Fourth Previous Fault 2012 PATS AN Value 2013 F019 Al2 Value 2017 PO23 Software Version 2032 POS Shaft Position 2034 POS Position fraction of revo 2035 POSS Position number of revo 2046 POO CAN Network Status mAr POT Cbl Rerantnn T elena Dg gt B 2004 POO4 DC Voltage Help Ladder diagram 1 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 G MX 2000 4M 2001 0 ADDRESS RESULT oM Ww O00 l FUNC OUT HIGH AMW 7001 INDEX OUT Low pr SM VW7002 SUB IND 2 SIZE TIMEOUT 3 Operation When the bit marker MX2000 suffers a transition from 0 to the card will send a message via CANopen grid requesting the reading of the object 2004h When the value is received it will be stored on the word markers MW 7001 and MW 7002 Note WSCAN WEG Software CANopen Config This block only works when the card is enabled as master of the CANopen grid in other words a valid grid configuration for the card must be loaded through the WSCAn software Modbus Modbus RTU Overview Operation in the Modbus RTU Network Master Mode Only interface RS485 allows op
99. EE EE Le ee EE ees KE eee ee C EE EE SX3032 HMI Key 1 SX3034 HMI Key 0 SX3036 HMI Key Revert Speed Direction SX3038 HMI Key Local Remote SX3040 SX3064 SX3066 SX3068 SX3070 JoSX3101 Ag General Enabling SX3108 Ag Start Stop JoSX310S Ag Speed Direction SX3107 SOG SX3100 JP LocalRemote SXI ErrorReset OS S O SW3300 Motor Speed 13 bits O SW3302 Motor Synchronous Speed rpm SW3306 Speed Reference rpm JoSW3308 Am S JoSW3310 ft PG SW3400 Speed Auxiliar Encoder JoSW3402_ ControlMode SW3404 SemCoumt pf 2 SRWOL PTC MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SX3000 Reset Reset SX3001 Local Command 1 Local Command 1 SX3002 Local Command 2 Local Command 2 SX3003 Local Command 3 Local Command 3 SX3005 Motor Running SX3006 Local Remote Local Remote 108 CFW700 e CF W701 WLP v9 90 Weg MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SW 3300 PTC SRW01 RCD MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SX3000 Reset Reset SX3001 Local Command I Local Command 1 SX3002 Local Command 2 Local Command 2 SX3003 Local Command 3 Local Command 3 S X3005 Motor Running SX3006 Local Remote Local Remote SCA06 MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SX3064 Blinker2Mm 2 SX3066 StopRunPuse oo e O SX3068_ Always0 1 2 O SX3070 A
100. ENTS composto por 1 entrada Execute 1 sa da Done e 9 argumentos sendo eles Master 18 Slave 18 PhaseShift 1181 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the displacement is performed OPERATING MODE When the MC Phasing block is executed the drive does not change the current operating mode In the execution of the block the shaft status will not change BLOCK ERRORS Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status P202 different from 4 PLC Drive is not in the Synchronized Motion status MC block not executed Internal fault Master Shaft is not in synchronism MC_Phasing block in execution Is only allowed the execution of a MC_Phasing block at a EXAMPLE Language 237 0 1 2 3 4 3 6 7 6 M6500 MN6SOL Execute MC GearlnPos FastInput FastInput Real Real l Fiatiohlumerator 1 MRatioDenominator Desabilitado Desabilitado Command4borted H Desabilitado Error Desabilitado ErrorlD Desabilitado 1000 00 H Acceleration 1000 00 H Deceleration Aborting W Butferllode Tah 6502 Teh 6505 Execute MC Phasing Done FastInput Real a 0 050000 _H PhaseShitt Desabilitado Desabilitado g Command4borted De abilitado Error he Desabilitado ErrorlD P De abilitado g 2HM 6502 2HM 6503 a a Pha
101. FSO0 La DATA 2 P vo F9002 7 0000000 ol I ODS EN FLZINT ENO ke ni The user parameters 800 and 801 are converted to the float registers 9000 e 9001 The float register 9000 is weg Language 267 multiplied by the float register 9001 and the result is stored on the float register 9002 The result is then converted to an integer and it is stored on the user parameter 802 Sample 2 25000 20 oll Wb O00 ol W600 l 33 EN MATH ENO DATA 1 RES H OPERATOR RES L DATA 2 OJER SIGHAL EN MATH ERO DATH1H RESH DATALL RES L OPERATOR OVER SIGNAL DATA 2 er aT S000 MIL al 1 O00 ol LOO en Nl EOD au ROOS ol OOS Maling f 1 ol x LOO ol I ODS In this example we have 25000 multiplied by 20 The result is equal to 500 000 which is equivalent to high result 7 and low result 41248 After that 500 000 divided by 33 has a result of 15151 and a reminder of 17 Sample 3 al AIO Mw 7000 S000 ol 7001 ol WOO I 32767 EN TRANSFER ENO SRC OST j EM MATH EH DATA 1 RES H OPERATOR RES L DATA OVER SIGHAL EM MATH ENO DATA 1H RES H DATA 1L RES L OPERATOR OER SIGHAL DATA 2 ol W000 oN WOO ol WO ol 1001 wM LOO ta NA TOOS to DA TOO M1004 ol 1OOS It converts the drive s analog input to an engineering unit Range AI gt 10 0 10Vec gt 327
102. FTPLC V1 4X CFW 09 CFW 09 SCA 05 CFW 11 SSW 06 NO CONTACT NC CONTACT 7 COIL NEGATE COIL SET COIL RESET COIL PTS COIS v NTS COIL INPOS INBWG SCURVE TCURVE ne E E E NSCANWEG SHIFT Sp STOP JOG _ gt SETSPEED i TON CTU TRANSFER MATH vin COMP SAT ving FUNC vant INT2FLOAT FLOAT2INT PID FILTER 7t ta AUTOREG Oo o o eee ee ee RXCANWEG ap yp CTENC USERFB MUX DMUX IDATA TCURVAR Weg Language 111 BOARDS EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY LADDER BLOCK PLCI v2 0x PLC2 V1 5X POS2 V1 6X SOFTPLC V2 0X SOFTPLC V1 4X CFW 09 CFW 09 SCA 05 CFW 11 SSW 06 H EE QSTOP SPEED v v v p RIC AS SEE AK USERERR MMC ml 1 gt z PLC11 01 PLC11 02 SRW01 PTC SRW01 RCD SCA06 SSW7000 and CFW500 BOARDS EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY LADDER BLOCK pr 11 01 V1 4X SRW01 PTC SCA06 V1 0X SOFTPLC V1 1X SOFTPLC V1 0X SSW7000 PLC11 02 V1 4X V4 0X CFW 11 SRW01 RCD CFW500 V4 0X COIL v v v v v SET COIL v v v v v mw v E E E SCURVE v HOME v om gt MSCANWEG v STOP v MATH v v v 41114 v v SAT v v v 4114 v v Ei WLP V9 90 BOARDS EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY LADDER BLOCK pr C11 01 V1 4X SRWOL PTC SCA06 V1 0X SOFTPLC V1 1X SOFTPLC V1 0X SSW7000 PLC11 02 V1 4X V4 0X CFW500
103. High value 1 and low value 1 represent a 32 bits value where the high value 1 contains the most significant 16 bits and the low value 1 contains the less significant 16 bits High result contains the division quotient and the low result contains the division remainder The signal bit is set when the instruction result is less than zero The overflow bit is set when high value 1 low value 1 value 2 gt 32767 in this moment the high result and low result saturate in 32767 The overflow bit is set when high value 1 low value 1 value 2 lt 32768 in this moment the high result and low result saturate in 32768 The overflow bit is set if division by zero is detected parameter or register with a 0 on the denominator In this moment the high result and low result saturate in 32767 or 32768 depending if the numerator value is greater or less than 0 For saturation signal effects zero is considered a positive number Pow result high result low data 1 data 2 double word word word Result high and result low represent a 32 bits data O bit sinal ligado quando o resultado da opera o for menor que zero O bit overflow ligado quando dado 1 dado 2 gt 2147483647 nesse momento o resultado fica saturado em 2147483647 OR resultado low dadol low dado 2 word word word AND resultado low dadol low x dado 2 word word x word XOR resultado l
104. IGURE 5 3 BSR Gel 24 AE uN On this toolbar you can find all functions relating to the online monitoring which are te LADDER MONITORING Al VARIABLES MONITORING En VARIABLESTREND pr MONITORING OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS E MONITORING PARAMETER BY HMI All online monitoring functions can be used individually or jointly 1 e all function use the same communication channel with the board realized through the shared interface Please consider that the more monitoring function are used the more information will be requested from the board which will slow down the monitoring functions Online Monitoring After the Ladder program has been compiled and loaded to the board you now can monitor the Ladder program by pressing the button online monitoring te Now the WLP tries establishing communication with the board and tests the communication with this board When no communication erros is detected following message will be displayed on the status bar at the bottom of the WLP Serial port 1 open successful On the same status bar you can find a blue LED that flashes indicating the the communication is operating correctly LE If some coomunication error is detected a box will be opened indicating the detected fault and which required action should be adopted After that the online monitoring will be disabled When the online monitoring is active all editing tools are disabled and the Editing window displays the logic
105. If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 7 SHIFT ACCESS Menu Insert Function blocks Positiong Shift Edit Tool Bar g FUNCTION Inserts a Shift 183 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking the left mouse button to the desired position If the cursor changes to symbol Denied the function block can not be inserted and one information is written to the status bar Ei 48 WLP V9 90 3 5 7 2 8 MC CamTableSelect ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning MC CamTableSelect Edit toolbar ES FUNCTION Inserts a MC_CamTableSelect 205 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 9 MC_CamCalc ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning MW CamCalc Edit toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a MW CamCalc 206 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 10 MC Camin ACESSO Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning M
106. If there is any edition error in the program they will be displayed during the compilation Forexample if a horizontal connection is missing the following compilation error will be displayed in the compilation T l 2 3 4 5 7 g 9 X Switch Ox EI 0 f Compilation Errors a WEG Ladder Programmer V 7 00 Alpha Copyright Cj 1999 2006 WEE All rights reserved Message sintax File name Pagqe Line Column 4 Code message 2 yprojetos wlp branches yd loyprojects tutarle tutoarle ldd Page OL 5 Warning C201 element 15 not connected at left 6 T Close Help 2 Figure Example of compilation error The errors generated were the following c weg wlp v4 01 projects tutor1 tutor1 ldd Page 01 Ln 00 Col 09 Warning C201 element is not connected to the left c weg wlp v4 01 projects tutor IVtutor1 Ildd Page 01 Ln 00 Col 00 Warning C203 logic incomplete Page Line and column where the error was found are always displayed If option Error location of the 330 WLP V9 90 Weg Display menu is enabled the cell where the error is will have a red border according to next figure 0 sym Figure Cell with compilation error 18 step On this step one should transfer the user s program to the board in question For such firstly one should check the serial communication configuration To configure the serial communication both board configuration and WLP softwar
107. Insert Function Blocks Positioning HOME Standard Toolbar l FUNCTION Inserts an Home 159 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 4 TCURVAR ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning TCURVAR uak Standard Toolbar Le Weg Menus 47 FUNCTION Inserts a Variable Trapezoidal Curve 165 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 5 CAM ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning CAM Standard Toolbar LA FUNCTION Inserts a CAM 167 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 6 CALCCAM ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning CALCCAM Standard Toolbar 15 FUNCTION Inserts a CALCAM 180 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position
108. Jerk 500 porns Jerk 500 000 rrr s Cursor 1 453 s eee I I I I I T I I I I I T I I I I EREEREER ee CERE E 4 OK Cancelar Ajuda Figure Simulator of s curve In this example the s curve was programmed with position 5 rotations that is one position of 5 turns around the motor axe with speed equal to 1000rpm acceleration equal to 180 rpm s and jerk equal to 500rpm s One can observe the several curves with their variants during the time where position is in red speed in black acceleration in green and jerk in blue In this example position was executed in 2 913s according to axe x of the graph Such parameters can bemodified so as to get the desired answer It should be very clear that this simulator is theoretical and that during positioning other situations may occur with current limitations due to the charge that couldmodify the positioning profile A relative positionmeans that it will be done fromthe point where the axe is For example if we program a relative position of 5 turns with a plus sign it means that the axe will turns 5 times clockwise from the point it is and if it is a minus sign it will be counterclockwise Another important thing in positioning are the units used in programming which are defined in menu Project option Units according to the next figure 342 WLP V9 90 Ei Position r revolutions Spe
109. Motors Automation Energy Transmission amp Distribution Coatings Software WLP User s Manual of RRES eT Py B7 z User s Manual Series WLP V9 90 Language English Publication Date 12 2014 Weg Content 3 0 Parte Welcome 10 Parte Il Overview 10 1 What the new NEPPE nnmnnn 10 2 GNOME 25 3 Installation and initialization of the WLP x rarnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnn 26 A MOGUCOM ep 27 5 Ped MENE oinn E E EREE EE EAEEREN 28 o Project NN 29 7 Configuration Wizards iscsensccceccecss iccccetesesceectanincteaccsiestesceaventscsaevecwseacanccesaea entwwncsenntwivecesanweacces 31 or INO TUTOR UNG Dialog S ee 31 Parte Ill Menus 32 EE E EEE EE EE 32 New meet ceeds e aeaea e e a dees aedeure E aee a e e eaS 32 OPEM EE a i EN 32 gt E E E PE 32 NELS a ante ce cee ete wneece ns eee cet etece ease deuce tect e cece dannaneen ee ceed ensues se ueca wed teacedde se ctece Seams acdvweaeteecatanceseeee 33 ENN 33 To EN EEE EV EN AR SAN 33 Remove scares seen ecnmetcuscea cee E euuge cae e e e e e e E E 33 Piit 2 33 Prnt Preview ae 34 PHOCOS CTU EE EE EE a a a i EE 34 Unis NN 34 POE SSN 34 PIE gece sen sea tence s act gcc papa ome ate snake one ee nn cs cm ee cise eee ets ee gas do fate aa Eaa a 35 Load the l st Project during initialization ccsccceceecewcstes eanctesendenscnicnssaceseedecweedaccncdesessecencescsscbeaectehesstentaureneees 35 Exit ct ccc cecc
110. N HOME ENO SFEED ACCELERATION SIGM OFFSET OFFSET ROTATION TYPE HAIS Figure Tutor8 Page I of 2 ol 407 to 407 vM 2005 Weg Tutorial 345 l 2 3 4 5 T B J RELATIVE POSITIONING WITH 5 FROFILE 4HD FEEDBACE OF REAL POSITION ole ol 2002 ol 2003 HES Positive H SIGN POSITION 2 10 00 M POSITION 1000 0 H SPEED 180 0 H ACCELERATION EN SCURWE ENO 500 0 H JERE Absolite H MODE Feal MARIS ola NLA 20022 ol 2004 EN SCURWE ENO H H Negative W SIGM POSITION 10 00 W POSITION 1000 0 4 SPEED 180 0 H ACCELERATION T s00 0 H JERE Absolnite HODE Feal MAXIS Va 407 EN TRANSFER ENO EN TRANSFER ENO SPT SA HSRC OST r ME 2010 10 MZ S407 OP WSs WSRC OST E AM w O00 12 Vol 3407 i SOP Wise WERC OST E MAb roo 14 Figure Tutor8 Page 2 of 2 Functioning page 2 In this second page there are two blocks of s curve positioning programmed as absolute One of them is programmed for position 10 Plus 10 00 and another for position 10 Minus 10 00 Still in this same page there are three TRANSFER blocks reading the value of three parameters of the system which are P756 Sign of real position 0 negative 1 positive P757 Real position rotation P758 Real position fraction of turn degree 10 The result obtained in these three parameters after the execution of each one of the blocks is displa
111. ON P PT ET DESCRIPTION This block is formed by I IN input 1 Q output and 2 arguments being PT preset time ET elapsed time The IN input is responsible for the block enable The Q output informs if the elapsed time reached the programmed time PT Preset Time 244 WLP V9 90 WE The desired time is formed by a data type and one address or a constant value depending on the chosen data type The signal data type may be constant user parameter word marker For the constant data type the maximum permitted value is 30000 ms ET Elapsed Time The elapsed time is formed by a data type and a address The data type of the elapsed time may be user parameter word marker NOTE In the option User Parameter the current value is not saved in the E2APROM memory i e this last value is not restored OPERATION If the IN input is 0 the Q output remainis in 0 and elapsed time keeps unaltered If the IN input goes 1 the elapsed time is cleared and then incremented until the value on the argument of the preset time is reached After this value has been reached the Q output changes to I and remains at this status until the IN input changes to 0 FLOWCHART TON Initialize did reach the preset time CHART N TON Weg Language 245 EXAMPLE IX1O1 WEI EN TCURWE ENO Positwro H SIGH POSITION SAD Weod TW801 POSITION ol Wed SPEED RU
112. POS O1 board of the SCA 04 Implemented blocks INBWG 241 monitors the motor speed through a programmed value SCURVE 153 executes a positioning with S profile in positioning loop TCURVE 156 executes a positioning with trapezoidal profile in positioning loop HOME 159 executes a machine home position STOP 146 cancels or stops a movement that is being executed JOG 250 executes a movement in speed loop SETSPEED 02131 operates in speed different as the POS 01 board set speed TRANSFER 273 executes a data transfer INT2FL 274 converts an entire and fractional word to float point word FL2INT 275 converts a float point Word to an entire and fractional word MATH 261 executes adding subtracting multiplication and division operations with float point COMP 260 executes comparisons between 2 data with float point PID 250 executes a PID type control max 2 controls per project SAT 269 executes data saturation in float point in required FUNC 268 executes mathematical functions such as square root sine cosine tangent etc FILTER 253 executes a low pass filter or high pass filter of a variable with float point General Information This guide is intended to provide you with comprehensive information on how to use the functions and tools available in the WLP software The WLP or Weg Ladder Programmer is a Windows based software that allows the user to program u
113. SV I Interpolation point between the point and the next point OD Slave position for the point OS Master position forthe point NOTES As already mentioned above the CAM block is always relative Thus the first point of the table point will be always master 0 and slave 0 Master virtual axis Slave effective axis drive Tools for the chart control Language 173 Cursor Chart plotting area ol 02 oF 04 95 Of 07 08 09 Master scale axis Slave scale axis Tools for the chart control melects the position line 200rt elects the speed line Fit to screen melects the acceleration line Selects the Jerk line Disables the selected line mets the selected Fit to Screen line mets the width of the selected line en the height ofthe selected line Cursor values Relative values for the point selected by the cursor Cursor values Master 00 rot Slave 0 0 rot Speed 0 0 rpm Acceleration O 0 rpm Jerk 00 pms Master speed Speed used for the speed acceleration and slave jerk calculation 174 WLP V9 90 Weg Master Speed 1 0000 rpm NOTE The speed acceleration and slave jerk should be used as reference for the cam profile development where they contents are calculated numerically without considering the load inertia torque and dynamic of the drive Adding a new point to the cam profile A point can be
114. SX301 ErrorReset OO O SX3012 Undervoltage SX3014 PIDOperaton o O SX3006 Am PG SX3018 Configuration Mode SX3032 HMiky o o o O SX3034 IM Key 07 SX3036__ HMI Key Revert Speed Direction HMI Key Local Remote ee S8X3040 J CMT Key JOG SW3300 Motor Speed 13 bits 3 sWw3301 Speed Reference 13 bits SW3302 Motor Synchronous Speed rpm SOFTPLC SSW 06 SX3000 RotatingMotor 1 SX3001 A tarO Stop gt SX3002 General Enabling active ooo SX308 General Enabling gt SX3004 nog PG SX3008 deg SX3006 In Acceleration SX3007 ENN Q Clockwise 1 Counterclockwise SX3008 InCurremtlimt 1 e Ei Language 107 MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SX3009 0 0 Local 1 Remote PA Full Voltage At Full Voltage SX3010 re eee SX3012 With Alarm FE n SX3014 In Deceleration 3 EE NSX3015 fe SX3016 SX3018 InBraking eee SX3020 In change of Speed Direction Jf O O Z O Z O O O o OO O O O OOOO O O O OO SX3034 In Counterclockwise sense fesse User Fault O OO SW3303 User Fault SW3305 ser Alarm PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 MARKER SX3000 General Enabling active oo SX3002 RampEnaled SX3004 Speed Direction SX3006 1060 PG SX3008 Local Remote SX300 Ft PG SX3012 Undervoltage SX3014 PIDOperaton SX3006 Am PG SX3018 Configuration Mode
115. TN NNN 243 NN 246 TU NN 247 PD 250 UVER R E ea eee cana gates icledoatecactenosc 253 GO EE pete ge bse cap NENNE eee 255 EO EEE NE A NN 258 Cal Cul Atl EE ER GEE E EE NRE 260 COMP eee 260 MIT 2 261 WU e e e e e A A A 268 NT 269 ME EN 270 EG REE EEE ENE NE 272 TANSTOR GING 6 uvante 273 TRAD EEE 273 NELS 274 VM NN 275 PIL aaee Ser setcgaetta a tartans fas bacsase A AEE A oat cad dstdseeedunsadteqiecece 276 IE EEE EE 277 CAN NETWOTK tesissecssesiiaavecesevnnctuicvcsinwsnctuctvcancedostnetubeuscdeeddedhessassabaiidauadedadetcevaceuibuseuesustvdstunsdsinetubeuscieetesdaesiaets 278 MEET 278 FOM o aeo E A ee 279 SB D N E E EE A E E nee 279 MOODUS oos E 281 Modbus RTU OvervieWw rarrrvvvrranrrnvvnrrnnnrsevrrrannsernnranessennrrnnrsseverunsnsennrrnnnssenerrunnsennerunsssennrrunnseenerunsseeene 281 MB RSAC as torvessnraicea anaE nA OE E O aaa E aN 282 MENE 285 MB RARE Teien forredderinrsen 288 ENN 291 ERE Jure 294 EEE EEE RK NE NE EE NE VEN 307 6 User BIOcks isvvscccicscsnssvnessinsnvessscnansnsssessnscecseccessesnsindwensnensisvuesnswsseeeniaduseudntensnstensaennensatedenensanen 308 User Blocks Installed in the WLP uuussasessdnnmasenmtnadnnnskanekienvmnarjemiisdinneda 308 Parte VIII Compiler 309 1 General Review iscceccectoncecanceanececeecacesciccanuwaeduceeuccsanesevccincecsdeusacocscauccsnveredcssiensa peanaiceanccasensneuters 309 2 PAGE o a a a 309 SEOS a E E 310 Copyright 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved
116. Table argument determines which cam table of the CAM curve you wish to select for execution Its value can be from 1 to 10 The Cam Table argument can be programmed with constant word marker user parameter TABLE Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Table argument determines which cam table of the CAM curve will be calculated according to the block arguments Its value can be from 11 to 20 The Table argument can be programmed with constant word marker user parameter CAM TABLE ID Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Cam Table ID argument is the identification of the cam table of the CAM curve for use in the MC Camln block Its value can be from 1 to 20 The Cam Table ID argument can be programmed with constant word marker user parameter NUMBER OF POINTS Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Number Of Points argument configures the number of points of the CAM curve seeing that the initial Weg Language 127 point zero position of the master and of the slave is not considered The number of points cannot be greater than the maximum number of points of the corresponding cam table previously programmed by means of the CAM PROFILES tool The Number Of Points argument can be programmed with constant word marker user parameter MASTER POINTS Used in the MC blocks Movement Control Double marker that configures the position of the master of the fir
117. URVE 4 ACCELERATION x b ENO 1 SCAN CYCLE J EXAMPLE XIE 4MX2000 Pp A AM X2000 OE EN TCURWE ENO sO WS00 SGK POSITION ol Wel 40802 POSITION Aal SPEED so Wedd ACCELERATION Relativo H MODE Real MAAIS When a transition from 0 to 1 is captured at the digital input 1 a Tcurve positioning is started in the absolute mode configued with the signal of the user parameter 800 with the number of revolutions of the user parameter 801 and with the fraction of revolution of the user parameter 802 with the speed of the user parameter 803 and with an acceleration based on the user parameter 804 in rpm s Since it is an absolute positioning is required that a machine zero search has been executed previously When finished it writes I for one scan cycle at the digital output 1 Weg Language 159 7 5 2 3 HOME SYMBOL EN HOME ENO SFEED ACCELERATION SIGM OFFSET OFFSET ROTATION TAPE AAIS DESCRIPTION It is formed by 1 EN input I oe input I ENO output and 6 arguments as follows _ directi nli speed n acceleration 115 E ii f f i 114 type Standard 1591 Immediate 159 E U li S 160 Unidi ith S 1 Null Pul 1160 Unidi ith Null Pul 160 E B C S 160 Bi Di ith S 1 Null Pul 161 axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ZEROSW input is responsible for informing the block t
118. WS0S ACCELERATION Relativo M MODE Feal MHAIS VKI oe oll We000 When the digital input 1 of the drive is 1 a positioning based on the user parameter 800 to 803 is enabled After this positioning has been concluded the digital output 1 is set and the timer is enabled After the programmed 2000 ms have been elapsed the digital output I is reset Ei 246 WLP V9 90 7 5 6 2 RTC SYMBOL DESCRIPTION It is composed by I input EN I output Q and 6 arguments listed below WEEK weekdays programmed for block actuation TIME ON initial time hour minute and second for switching on the output TIME OFF final time hour minute and second for switching off the output Q OPT normal or inverted output option ONERROR option for error condition it generates alarm or it generates fault for the drive ERROR error indication in the RTC block The EN input is responsible for the enabling of the block The Q output is activated according to the programming of the arguments OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the Q output will be 0 If the EN input is 1 e Q OPT 0 normal output the Q output goes to level I only when the current time is higher than the initial time and lower than the final time e Q OPT I inverted output the Q output goes to level I only when the current time is lower than the initial time or higher than the final time Note When there is an error in the real time clo
119. a transfer Obs this new blocks is available for the followings firmware versions V1 80 of the PLC1 V1 20 of the PLC2 and V1 30 of the POS2 Blocks changed New options on MATH 261 block Operations in word pow or and xor nor nand xnor shift and aschift operations in float pow New options on EUNC 268 block exp In log10 trunc frac round New options on INPOS 239 block lt 6 more types of homing on HOME 159 block New options on PID 250 block manual or automatic selection direct or reverse and filter on reference New option on SHIFT 183 block degrees scan cycle WLP V5 00 New ladder blocks MACRO 294 the user can create and use ladder sub routines into the program CTENC 255 encoder pulses counter MATH 261 possibility of executing math instructions with words COMP 260 possibility of executing comparison instructions with words FUNC 268 possibility of executing math functions with words SETSPEED 213 possibility of using float marker do set speed of block MSCANWEG 278 possibility of select between real speed and reference speed to send for slaves Obs this new blocks is available for the followings firmware versions V1 70 of the PLC1 V1 10 of the PLC2 and V1 20 of the POS2 New functions WLP edit environment save all projects and close project Variables Monitoring 8 remember last file and save as file Trend of Variables 84 reme
120. a type was user parameter or word marker the unit is RPM revolutions per minute Syncronism This field has 1 data type and 2 addresses or constants depending on data type The data type can be constant user parameter word marker The addresses or constants are destinates to the relationship between master and slave Important The syncronism relationship only is applied when the field speed was encoder FUNCTION If EN 0 the block is not executed and the ENO 0 If 1 pulse at least 1 scan cycle was applied to EN and do not have other block active will be executed a trapezoidal provile positioning where the speed can be changed during the positioning When the positioning finish the ENO goes to 1 during 1 scan cycle Important This block works in position loop keeping this feature after its execution 166 WLP V9 90 Ei FLOWCHART TLURVAR Is there one Hositioning active Did positioning finish start positioning finish the block Y ENO 1 CHART EN Speed Reference Mator Drive Shaft Speed EXAMPLE ENO 3 atleast 1 scan cycle now scan cycle ENO Position Language 167 MLA 2000 p ol 2000 oe EN TCURWAR ENO ol Wed TW802 kPOSITION to Weald ACCELERATION ol WS800 H OIRECTION ol Wests We SPEED SOURCE lil HM SPEED GAIN Real MAAIS When a transition from 0 to 1 at the digital i
121. aaveni oes Peadusdacncxetneeayueceucene er vensituvedescdteedinenanaareemiiaumenivecentareieas 132 EE 133 ETL 134 RESET Ol 135 PI COIL e N 136 Mol 137 MEDEO 137 5 FOTON BIOCKS ces eis daei a i 138 Gontrol e Ge MOVIMENTO nasa vaccciieis ccs ncccesnceteensaideaceecesicencescavsiis veeeuasiis saadacssdkveceeusdsives cadvacabssussedsactecuntenscssassiateees 138 BS FR 138 DON FE 140 I 110 EE EE EE EE EE EE 142 MIT 145 TORP LE 146 OT ceases ce es ce a seen eset pe E ee seis seen ew ese ete eee sete eee 150 FAI NNN 151 POONA 153 ME php 153 TINE tease cc cs pe vee gecesi sce E AT 156 En 159 TEN 165 NN NN 167 EEE EEE EEE EEE ENN 180 TT 183 MM NNN 185 MENN 189 VE ENN 194 MOES AS eg EE NE EEE gene E 197 EE EEE 200 RNA 202 ME FA 204 MO TNS Ne 205 MINT 206 VEE SE EEE ENE ENN EE ER ET VEE 209 EEE SEE EE EEE NER 212 Movement 4444 213 ETE rece cee csc cee epee css a eect 2 eet acme psec eee ete toe cutee ee a tecscaete cn oat ene ease eacs cece seeenee 213 ODE NN 216 TED he 218 Copyright O 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved 8 WLP V9 90 Weg 5 PEP e E E nase tedesansae evansunceaiechs gy suteuaseuecse sess eporuesaeeceuacsesees 220 KEEGAN 223 CT BOK EE EE NM E 227 FUNN 227 ATORE NE ents oiatteamsetooteoiesce eeeruecexvantacsnaes 228 ME UM EEE EEE ae econ 230 MC VF Eee 234 ME Ne 235 EE GREER 238 ET EE peeeesdectedeuceecesdecesscises 239 NPS en me a Oe E 239 Ne 241 PEG EEE EE EE EE NE S 243
122. aft will run 360 within one second in the clockwise direction of rotation MC MoveAbsolute SYMBOL Execute M MoseAbsolute Acceleration Command 4borted Deceleration Error Errorll Bufferklode Updateflode DESCRIPTION It executes a positioning for the absolute position programmed When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments A positioning for the absolute position configured in the Position argument will be executed with a maximum speed configured in the Velocity argument and an acceleration deceleration configured in the Acceleration and Deceleration arguments Depending on the distance of the positioning and the acceleration and deceleration values the motor speed will not reach the maximum configured speed The positioning direction will depend on the current position of the motor and the position configure If the current position is smaller than the configured position the positioning will be in the positive direction clockwise and if the current position is greater than the configured position the positioning will be in the negative direction counterclockwise When the positioning finishes the Done output goes to 1 for one scan cycle or while the Execute input is in l ARGUMENTS It is composed of 1 Execute input 1 Done output and 14 arguments which are Velocity 119 Aceleration 119 Decelerati
123. after pressing the button OK 84 Ei WLP V9 90 5 7 tmp mv WLP Variables Monitoring File Help hd Mord Marker 6000 1500 Insert Edit rie Delete Down Now the number inserted in the column Value corresponds to the effective variable value acquired from the board through the communication interface In this dialog box you can also edit the variable delete it or move it up and down Through the menu File at the left bottom corner of the dialog box you can save and open the variable configurations that have been made in the respective dialog box When the variable monitoring box is active and has been configured you can write values in variables of type bit marker word marker float marker system bit marker user parameter system parameter and digital outputs To write in variables you must select with the mouse the variable to be written and click on the button or give a double click on the variable to be written The following box will be displayed HMW 6000 In this box you must write the new value to be written and confirm it by the button Trend of Variables Through the variable trend dialog box you can check the status of the variables used in the ladder program indifferent if you are monitoring the ladder program graphically for instance with a pen plotter or not For loading this dialog box press the button Variable Trend S The dialog box of the variable trend has followin
124. all the variable monitoring 82 files In order to open the variable monitoring dialog box double click the text Variable Monitoring Dialog or the file name Parameters Value Dialog It lists all the parameter value 57 files In order to open the parameter value dialog box double click the text Parameters Value Dialog or the file name Monitoring Inputs Outputs It gives access to the input output monitoring dialog 88 box In order to open the input output monitoring box double click the text Monitoring Inputs Qutputs Monitoring Parameter by HMI It gives access to the parameter monitoring 90 through the HMI dialog box In order to open the parameter monitoring through the HMI dialog box double click the text Monitoring Parameter by HMP Configuration Wizards They are routines especially created to configure in a guided way the equipment applied in the project Those routines guide the user in order to configure the equipment in a simple and self explained form Those routines are presented according to the equipment to be configured and to the selected project The configuration wizards are also available in the Equipment sub menu of the Tools menu The following equipments have defined configuration wizards SRW01 PTC and SRWO01 RCD Control Configuration It configures the SRWOI relay control mode Protection Configuration It configures the SRWOI relay protection act
125. ar 3 5 7 7 3 FUNC ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Calculation FUNC Standard Toolbar ia FUNCTION Inserts an mathematical function 268 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 7 4 SAT ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Calculation SAT Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a Saturation 269 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 54 Ei WLP V9 90 3 5 7 7 5 MUX ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Calculation MUX Standard Toolbar J FUNCTION Inserts a Multiplexer 270 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 7 6 DMUX 3 5 7 8 ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Calculation DMUX Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a Demultiplexer 272 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking w
126. arameter 800 is 0 write 0 to the digital output 1 otherwise writes 1 SET COIL SYMBOL s DESCRIPTION Consists of 1 input and 1 argument The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the current value is not saved in the E2PROM memory 1 e the last value is not recovered In addition the even values correspond to 0 and the odd ones correspond to I OPERATION The argument is set when the input signal is 1 The argument will be reset only when one component resets coil is activated CHART 7 4 4 Weg Language 135 SET COIL EXAMPLE ToL WSO 0X101 SUWSO0 JKL 5 wl If the user parameter 801 and the digital output 1 of the drive are 1 or the digital input 1 is 1 and the user parameter 800 is 0 it sets the digital output 1 Otherwise the output value is maintained RESET COIL SYMBOL ARH DESCRIPTION Consists of I input and I argument The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the current value is not saved in the ERPROM memory i e the last value is not recovered In addition the even values correspond to 0 and the odd ones correspond to I OPERATION When the input signal is 1 the argument is reset The a
127. arameters Click on the Next button Wizard New Macro Step 4 of 4 Tou are able now to create the following macro Mame HETE M Director c propetosjvlpkbranchestvd TOYFROJECTS 2teste MACROS Parameter PU lt BODLEAN gt Name ON Parameter P1 lt BODLEAN gt Name OFF Parameter P16 lt BOOLEAN gt Name OUT lt Voltar Cancelar Ajuda On the fourth step of the USERFB creation assistant it is possible do review all the options defined on the previous steps In case it is necessary to change anything click on the Back button otherwise click on the Finish button After clicking on the Finish button a new ladder edition window will be opened as presented in the following figure Ei Language 299 E RETEM mid 0 This window will have the USERFB name plus the extension mld which defines a file of the type USERFB For this example we will use the following ladder diagram l 3 4 5 oF MO oF NM oF MLG 1 oF M16 Where PMO USERFB parameter 0 PM1 USERFB parameter and PM16 USERFB parameter 16 It is possible to use all the ladder blocks available for a specific equipment inside a USERFB ladder diagram All the arguments of these blocks can be defined as a USERFB parameter By activating the option TAG of the WLP software the ladder diagram will be presented as follows 0 l B J OH OFF OUT 1 OUT l The symbols for each USERFB param
128. ard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts an In Position 239 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 5 2 INBWG ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Verify INBWG Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts an In Movement 241 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar IT Eq Menus 51 3 5 7 6 PLC 3 5 7 6 1 TON ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC TON Standard Toolbar 6l FUNCTION Inserts a Timer On 243 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 6 2 RTC ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC RTC Standard Toolbar 25 FUNCTION Inserts a RTC 246 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be in
129. ation wizards of application PUMPGENIUS Multipump Single Drive V1 04 for CFW500 It was generated the V1 05 WLP V9 60 Included new equipments SRWO1 ETH New functions CFW11 V5 12 SRWO1 PTC V5 05 SRWO1 RCD V5 05 WLP V9 51 Corrections Error for CFW500 CFW501 and CFW 100 during download in Portuguese language show unspecified error message box Error in programmable parameters editor dialog CFW700 Failed to open programmable parameters editor dialog for CFW500 for smaller versions than 1 50 In English language the timebase for TON ladder block for CFW500 only show centiseconds option and since the 1 00 version of firmware options of seconds and minutes are valid New functions CFW11 Ve3 79 Vb3 96 V5 10 and V5 11 CFW100 V2 01 WLP V9 50 Included new equipments CVW300 New functions Update WLP software and USB driver to support Windows 8 32 and 64bit in Portuguese English and Spanish Application PUMPGENIUS Multipump SingleDrive V1 03 in Portuguese English and Spanish for CFW500 SRWO1 PTC V5 00 SRWO1 PTC V5 01 SRWO1 RCD V5 00 e SRWOI RCD V5 01 CFW700 V2 01 e CFW701 V2 01 Corrections Error in sequence of datatypes in TRANSFER block for CFW 100 System markers SX3014 SX3016 SX3018 SX3022 and SX3024 were not accepted for CFW500 Error related to exchange of versions between v1 29 v1 28 and Ve3 19 and Ve3 20 for SCA06 Error in wizards to process upl
130. ault for transporting project to another computer without any project macro no project will be transmitted No network markers in the address table When the address table was closed the WLP application focus was lost No user parameters are opened in English language during variable monitoring Macros text font has been changed including space character and increasing the number of the macro parameter characters WLP Vo 11 Correction of functional deviations V6 10 Problem on opening projects that have been created on the WLP ve5 10 r2 Problem on opening projects that have been created on the WLP 4 20 or minor Problem on the online monitoring dialog box The dialog boxes disappeared after a SAVE command Problem on the macro block This block had a problem when INT2EL 274 or FL2INT 275 blocks were used in the same project Problem on the SCURVE 153 and TCURVE 156 simulator Problem on opening macro files Minor bugs have been fixed eg Overview 23 WLP V6 10 New features CANopen master to PLC2 using WSCAN 57 WEG Software CANopen software New ladder blocks SDO 2791 service data object CANopen master TCURVAR 165 executes a positioning with variable trapezoidal QSTOP 150 stops a movement adefendant for the fast entrance of the connector X8 bolt 8 null pulse of encoder MUX 270 and DMUX 272 multiplexer and demultiplexer IDATA 276 indirect dat
131. bar 3 5 7 8 4 IDATA ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Transference IDATA Block Bar FUNCTION Inserts a IDATA 276 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 8 5 USERERR 3 5 7 9 ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Transference USERERR EFF Block Bar REl FUNCTION Inserts a USERERR 277 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar CAN Network 3 5 7 9 1 MSCANWEG ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks CAN Network MSCANWEG CAM Standard Toolbar 56 WLP V9 90 Weg FUNCTION Inserts a MSCANWEG 278 element See also FOLLOW 227 DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 9 2 RXCANWEG ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks CAN Network RXCANWEG CAN Standard Toolbar hel FUNCTION Inserts a RXCANWEG 279 element DESCRIPTION
132. block is executed and AbsSwitch search starts The shaft status is changed to Homing In case 1 when the block is executed the AbsSwitch is not activated since the Direction argument is 204 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 5 2 14 configured as MC_SwitchNegative the movement will be in the negative direction When a leading edge occurs in AbsSwitch SwitchMode MC_EdgeOn the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred In case 2 when the block is executed the AbsSwitch is activated since the Direction argument is configured as MC_SwitchNegative the movement will be in the positive direction and when leaving the AbsSwitch the motor stops and changes the movement to the negative direction When a leading edge occurs in AbsSwitch SwitchMode MC_EdgeOn the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred All the movements are performed with an acceleration deceleration programmed in the Standard Profile When returning to the leading edge position of the AbsSwitch the Done output of the block bit marker 6501 is set and remains in I while the Execute input bit marker 6500 is set In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6501 the MC_StepDirect block is executed and the user s reference position P0052 and P0053 is changed to 3 5 revolutions P0052 8192 and P0053 3 The shaft status is changed to Standstill When the bit marker 6500 is r
133. bol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 3 3 SPEED ACCESS Menu Insert Function Block Movement SPEED Standard Toolbar Is FUNCTION Inserts a SPEED 218 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 3 4 REF ACCESS Menu Insert Function Block Movement REF Ref Standard Toolbar Fer FUNCTION Inserts a REF 220 element 50 WLP V9 90 Weg DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 4 Gear Box 3 5 7 4 1 FOLLOW ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Gear Box FOLLOW Edit Toolbar Se FUNCTION Inserts a FOLLOW 227 element See also MSCANWEG 278 DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 5 Verify 3 5 7 5 1 INPOS ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Verify INPOS Stand
134. borted Error ErrorlD T Buffer lode EndOfFrofile A A 8003 MMag elt 8005 Execute MC Camin InSynre 7 CamTablelD 10 CommandAborted Error ErrorlD 11 Bufferade EndOtProtile In the transition from 0 to I of bit marker 8000 the MW_CamCalc block is executed and the point table I I word marker 13001 will be calculated according to the block arguments When the calculation of point table 11 is finished the Done output bit marker 8001 is set while the Execute input remains set With the bit marker 8001 set the MC Camln block can be executed In the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 8002 the first MC Camln block is executed If it is necessary to adjust the point table of the CAM curve just make the adjustment in the double markers 18000 18001 18010 and 18011 change the content of word marker 13001 to 12 and execute the MW_CamCalc block again In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 8003 the second MC Camln block Buffer Mode programmed Buffered will be executed without losing the position of the master shaft as soon as the first MC_CamIn block finishes executing the curve in execution Ei 212 WLP V9 90 7 5 2 18 MC CamOut SYMBOL Execute ML CamOut DESCRIPTION Finish the MC Camln block When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be executed and the existing synchronism will be finished The shaft will keep the speed of the instant in w
135. bsolute positioning of 2 turns with a plus sign then the axe will have to turn twice clockwise to reach point zero and 2 turns more clockwise to reach position 2 turns This is how absolute positioning works always referred to a point defined as zero Actually this point zero is defined through a special positioning block This block is called search of zero machine which is a block that will be used only to define the zero point for all absolute positioning See the program below Tutors 344 WLP V9 90 10 ll 2 13 0 l ENABLE DRIVE BR TAS mM 2000 EN TRANSFER ENO ti FEEDRACE OF DRIVE ENABLE EN TRANSFER ENO il SEARCH THE ZERO MACHINE POINT KE vM 2002 told 100 0 500 00 Positive 0 00 Cloclnanse Standardt Real Functioning page 1 In this first page is the block of zero search This block should always be the first to be executed due to its function of defining the zero position for all absolute position When enabling the zero search block through the EN input the motor will turn according to programmed parameters of speed acceleration and direction While the motor is turning the block will wait for the sign of the zero key which is connected in the ZEROSW input of the block when receiving this sign the block will understand that this is position zero For more details about the zero search block refer to the card s manual E
136. ce eee certain E a EE e une ceececemee enn eeiceeuaweeeteteeneesiseer se Ueveeedeuemeaceacemesec 35 ET ae Rare ea ete ne nen rere Se een oer eee eee eT re eee en eee ee ee ee eee oe ee 35 Undo ev 35 PREG ee caeaeeceennet cence EEEE E ESE E 36 GE EE EEE EE EE 36 CODY EE EE NN SEE EE NE E ENE 36 Paste NN 36 Find EE EEE ME EEE EE NE NE 37 SVEN 37 Standard Bar seisis eo fe er ar Or ee ee ee 37 Communication Bar s ciscapeasescancicecsetcemacaecaneduaieerecdenimeneatisekusuucsnentetinasiesadeausencdenssaetnseas geeedeuadbeatsetnateemuadeccaseue 37 EINEN geen nec rr nO OO oe ee ee a eee er eee eee 37 POKER 37 POE ase it hess ik ge a pe cise en na sc es asst eh ss eo chee wc ceca le ns me aan a wena egniveas eae 38 SET een een ene E Re ee ee ae a 38 Copyright 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved WLP V9 90 Weg Project TICO Las 38 a E E 38 ppe ee ea e o EE E E E E E E 38 Compilation GUI ONS Lee 39 REES e E E E N E E E E 39 Compilation INN ae 39 Address 190 IE Lun naadde 39 User parameter table avse 39 APIE a woe satmouay doutaseescunecednecutecusce se iceuees 40 PEST CONS en 40 here atel siiin O ean cawcawsawinwbansaeeaaaseueaweaaiics 40 Dee es 40 PrOVIOUS 4a4v4v44v4vs Sisencnanee gece ssieccecaaueincusnbuebslcuecadiesaistiusaceessauesdnbaususeusase ane tecaenudecaweasbeciwaidebocaatan 40 NE ass 41 GOTO aaa 41 SNOEN aa a see ewe ects ee cece cies eee gee cde eyeuwtinseseaeciete seeecceseeeseceeeane 41 EN sanaa E E A E 4
137. celeration in green In this example positioning was executed in 2 578s When comparing this t curve to the s curve positioned in more time one can observe that it has a speed profile much less aggressive than the t curve The t curve imposes more abrupt variations in the motor speed and as a consequence in the activated charge Absolut positioning with s curve and t curve Tutors In the previous example the relative type of positioning was executed which is always executed from the point where the motor axe is at the moment Now the concept of absolute positioning was be introduced The absolute positioning is always referred to a point defined as zero For example when executing an absolute positioning of 2 rotations with a plus sign the card will search the point in 2 rotations clockwise from the point defined as zero If at the position start the current position is lower than the desired position the axe will move clockwise If the current position is higher than the desired position the axe will move counterclockwise See next figure COUNTER CLOCKWISE r a CLOCKWISE 4 3 2 a 1 2 3 4 Figure Absolute positioning virtual scale Consider a virtual scale in which every motor axe turn clockwise corresponds to go I ahead in this scale And that at every turn counterclockwise corresponds to go back 1 in this scale If the axe is in position 2 in this scale that is at 2 turns from point zero and it executes an a
138. ck bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the positioning for position 10 revolutions starts In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6505 the second MC MoveAbsolute block is instantly executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the positioning for position 15 revolutions starts At the same time the Busy and Active signals of the first block bit markers 6501 and 6502 are reset and the CommandAborted signal bit marker 6503 is set for I scan When the position 15 revolutions is reached the Done output of the second block bit marker 65009 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 are reset The Done output bit marker 6509 will remain in 1 while the Execute input bit marker 6505 is set 122 WLP V9 90 weg BUFFERED When the block is programmed for Buffered and another block is in execution the block in execution will continue its movement until the end and this new block will wait to be executed EXAMPLE 0 1 w500 P 10 000000 200 00 1000 00 1000 00 ABORTING RISING TaNLA6505 15 000000 100 00 500 00 500 00 BUFFERED REING Execute Acceleration Deceleration Bufferklode Update lode Execube Position Velocity Acceleration Deceleration Bufferklode Update lode PAC love Absolute Command aborted Error ErrorlD MO MoseSbsolyute CommandAb
139. ck then it will be indicated at the ERROR output In the CFW11 PLC11 the HMI must always be connected for using this block COMMENTED EXAMPLE Ei Language 247 7 5 6 3 volt HOA Mon Tve Wed Thu Fri 18 30 0 22 30 0 Normal Generate Fault When the digital input I is 1 and the weekday were Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday or Friday and the current time were gt 18 30 00 and lt 22 30 00 the digital output I will be activated CTU SYMBOLO CU CTU a R FU cl DESCRIPTION It is formed by I CU input I R input I Q output and 2 arguments as follows PV preset counter CV counter value The CU input is the counting input The R input resets the counting when on The Q output informs if the programmed counting value has been reached PV Preset Value Depending on the chosen data type the preset value is formed by a data type and an address or a constant value The counting data type may be constant user parameter work marker For the constant data type the max allowed value is 30 000 CV Counter Value The counter value is formed by a data type and an address The counter value data type may be user parameter word marker NOTE In the User Parameter option the current value is not saved in the E2PROM memory i e this last value is not restored 248 WLP V9 90 Weg OPERATION When the CU input changes from 0 to 1 the count
140. ck by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 6 7 CTENC2 ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC CTENC2 1 3 Standard Toolbar rite FUNCTION Inserts a Encoder Counter 2 258 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 7 Calculation 3 5 7 7 1 COMP ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Calculation COMP aS Standard Toolbar zal IT Eq Menus 53 FUNCTION Inserts a Comparator 260 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 7 2 MATH ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Calculation MATH nm Standard Toolbar E FUNCTION Inserts an Arithmetical 261 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status b
141. ck force the motor deccelerate and came back to zero machine Speed 1 ZEROSW sensor detected 2 Instant which ZEROSW 0 3 Stopped position zero machine Position Bi Diretional with Sensor and Null Pulse It starts with a trapezoidal profile until reach the switch ZEROSW Then it inverts its direction until ZEROS W 0 Then it reaches the marker and this position will be the zero machine The block decelerates and comes back to the zero machine If the block and the switch ZEROSW were enabled the block run in oposite direction until ZEROSW 0 Then it reached the marker decelerated and came back to the zero machine Speed 1 ZEROSW sensor detected 2 Instant which ZEROSW 0 3 Null pulse detected zero machine 4 Stopped position zero machine Position OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block is not executed and the ENO output remains at 0 When the EN input is activated and no other positioning block is active the zero search is enabled with trapezoidal profile based on the characteristics of the programmed arguments When there is a pulse present for at least one scan cycle at the ZEROSW input the search for the zero pulse is started As soon as the zero pulse is found the stop process is started and then the shaft returns to the zero pulse position At this point the block is finished and the ENO output goes to I for one scan cycle and then returns to 0 NOTE If the block is enabled and the ZEROSW inpu
142. dAborted signal bit marker 6503 is set for 1 scan When the speed of 50 RPM is reached the InGear output of the second block bit marker 6509 is set and remains until the execution of other block 234 Ei WLP V9 90 7 5 4 4 MC GearinPos SYMBOL Execute ML GearlnPos Fatiokumerator FatinDenominator Command4borted Error ErrorlC Acceleration Deceleration Bufferksliaode DESCRIPTION It executes the synchronism in position between the programmed shafts When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments For the slave shaft to reach the speed of the master shaft a movement will be performed with an acceleration deceleration configured in the Acceleration and Deceleration arguments Once the synchronism is established the InSync output is set The movement direction will depend on the signal of the RatioNumerator If RatioNumerator is greater than zero the movement will be in the same direction as the master shaft and if the RatioNumerator is smaller than zero the movement will be in the opposite the direction of the master shaft It order to finish the block it is necessary the execution of another block or the changing of the drive to the Disabled or Errorstop status ARGUMENTS It consists of I Execute input I InSync output and 13 arguments which are Master 118 Slave n Ra
143. details about the performance refer to your Windows supporting documentation This application uses computer RAM If this application runs too slow or error messages such as out of memory are displayed this may be due to insufficient RAM Please find below some hints to improve the use of the memory of your computer Close all applications that are not being used Add more RAM to your computer You can determine the required memory capacity by checking the Windows 95 Windows 98 performance in the control panel or in the Task Manager of Windows NT If you are using more than 256 colors in your video monitor but you want to reduce this number please refer to your Windows documents For more detail how to improve the performance of your computer please refer to your Windows 95 Manual and to your CD ROM documents PRINTING PROBLEMS The screen resolution and the printing resolution are sometimes different each other Thus the printing quality may not be the same as shown on the screen If a General Protection Fault is displayed when you are printing some topic check the printer driver If possible install a later driver software Ensure that the printer is ON and that it permits printing from any application If the problem persists open the page Properties of the printer you are using Click on Font table and select a download method of True Types fonts that will work better with your system Copyright The information f
144. dress a representative Symbol the Minimum and the Maximum and the Color of the variable In the example below has been selected the word marker MW 6001 Insert Variable Type kW Word Marker n Address 6001 Symbol Tim gt Miniman 0 fel arimun 2000 Cancel Remove Weg Monitoring 87 After pressing OK the dialog box of the variable trend will be as follows E WLP Variables Trend File Graph Help I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 13 41 33 000 13 41 48 000 3 42 03 000 13 42 18 000 19 42 33 000 Color Symbol Type Address Min Max Cursor val Actual val A Timed PA Word Marker 6001 0 0 2000 0 START TREND As during the online monitoring process when the option Start Trend is pressed the WLP tries to establish the communication with the board and it will test the communication and executes the same operations as described above After the communication has been established the Trend will acquire the variables according to the requested cycle and will draft them on the screen as shown below 88 WLP V9 90 5 8 AO WLP Variables Trend File Graph Help 19 57 01 500 13 57 04 000 19 56 54 000 19 56 56 500 19 56 59 000 Scan 0 2032 Color Symbol Type Address Min Max Cursor val Actual val Time SoM Word Marker 6001 0 0 2000 0 1140 1140 Pa In this dialog box you can also edit and delete the variable In the menu File at the left bottom corner
145. e sad value I s Analog Inputs EN Enable Value awi swe T zawal ff Apply PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 Force Inputs Outputs Digital Inputs 16 1 Enable s t Value I sal JOB gt Analog Outputs EG Enable Value TOMT z ZUWE 1 EG zawa To Close 4 105 106 107 108 103 E a E 2 I 9 9 9 HE a m 99 Digital Outputs 07 1 Enable a value I s Analog Inputs Ev Enable Value tt z uz To PAIN E Analog Outputs ROW Enable Value ZUW m zawz To qn ft in W102 coe Weg Monitoring 93 5 11 5 12 IMPORTANT Only available for SoftPLC CFW 11 PLC11 01 and PLC1 1 02 General Information Online Through the general information window it is possible to monitoring the general information of the board In order to load this window it is necessary only to press the general information button oj In the same manner as in the online monitoring in this moment the WLP will try to establish the communication with the board by testing the communication with it and it will perform the same operations previously described The general information window has the following aspect General Information online General Information Equipment Connected ia 1 01 7 00 Equipment Status 5 Program Running Scan Cycle me 03 ME Ladder Project al Biri Project
146. e 97 for more details WLP V7 23 New functions An english wizard for the SWDA SWLC and SWMT surface winders has been included Before recording a backup it verifies if the file has been saved The SRW wizard has been changed in order to inform that the unbalance protection is only for three phase motors It generates a compilation error when putting SX system markers in contacts and coils for PLC1 PLC2 POS2 and SRW Correction of V7 24 functional deviations Illegal Operation Error was indicated when an anybus table was opened only one output was put in and the Close button was clicked By changing the CAME number of points to a constant and defining a value it always indicated an out of range error when OK was pressed Errors regarding the PW PD term and wrong comments in BTBA BTCC and BTTM applications were corrected The sign logic in the position conversion to floating point it was inverted in the PO2FLOAT user block has been corrected The wake up mode activation logic to enable the multipump system for the MBCF MBCM MPFIC and MPFLC applications has been corrected The visualization of the Line Speed Reference variable in the Surface Winder monitoring dialog box for BTBA BTCC BTTM SWDA SWLC and SWMT applications has been corrected The logic to switch off the pump driven by the inverter when this pump is disabled during operation with MBCM and MPFLC applications has been co
147. e Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments A stop will be executed with a deceleration configured in the Deceleration argument When the stop finishes the Done output goes to 1 for one scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 While the Execute input is in 1 no other MC block will be executed ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 9 arguments which are Deceleration 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the stop is finished OPERATION MODE When the MC Stop block is executed the drive will star operating in position grid and remain this way even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Stopping When the stop is finished and the block is no longer active the shaft status will change to Standstill BLOCK ERRORS Error Description Ei Language 143 Deceleration programmed below the minimum allowed Deceleration programmed above the maximum allowed Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status MC block not executed Internal fault Jerk programmed below the minimum allowed Jerk programmed abov
148. e MC blocks Movement Control This argument determines when and how the block will be executed in case there is another block in execution 120 WLP V9 90 Ei The Buffer Mode is always constant and can be e ABORTING e BUFFERED e SINGLE ABORTING When the execution of a block programmed for Aborting starts and another one is in execution the block in execution will be aborted canceled and this new block will be executed immediately EXAMPLE 0 1 2 3 3 6 7 4 9 WAAS 5 0 abo 04 0 Pi Lag Lai 10 000000 200 00 1000 00 1000 00 ABOERTING RISING Tak A6505 REAL 15 000000 100 00 500 00 500 00 ABORTING RING Execute Position Velocity Acceleration Deceleration Bufferh lode Updatet lode Execute Position Velocity Acceleration Deceleration Buffel lode Updatet lode PAC love Absolute Command 4borted Error ErrorlC M love absolute Command 4borted Error ErrorlC Tak 6501 Teh 6502 elhiX6503 Desabilitado Desabilitado wks TND6507 TSNL5508 Desabilitado Desabilitado TNL5509 Ei Language 121 2HMX6500 KE O O 2HMX6501 gt CO e l toMX6502 2HMX6503 wp op mb 1 td LL TT 1 Tf Ss os D Velocidade 200 2HMX 6506 2HMX6507 100 Posicao 15 10 In the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 the first MC MoveAbsolute block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this blo
149. e addition of the points used in all the Cam blocks inserted in the project exceeded the capacity of the memory allotted for the Cam profiles Action Erase some Cam block or reduce its number of points Error C126 Error compiling USERFB Why Some error occurred during the referred USERFB block compilation Action Verify the Cam block by trying to compile it separately Error C127 Memory reserved for user program exceeded Why The program size exceeded the allotted memory for user program Action Reduce the size of the user program Error C128 Unsupported floating point resource Why An attempt to use floating point with equipment that does not support floating point Action Modify the blocks in order to use fixed point integer Warnings See below the compiler warnings description Warning C201 element is not connected at the right side Why Element is not connected to the other elements in the left side Action complete or delete the logic Warning C202 the position value is too small to generate a trajectory Why the position value does not generate any trajectory this warning may be displayed in the function blocks in position S Curve trapezoidal curve Action fill out the field with a value gt 360 65536 0 005493 1640625 Warning C203 incomplete logic Why There is a vertical connection or one element is not connected the program is not complete Action delete the logic or connect th
150. e cells relating to the point and click on the button Remove Point Zoom of a determined chart area Click with the cursor on one of the edges of the region that should be zoomed and maintain the mouse button activated Move the mouse to mark the region At this moment a rectangle will be displayed on the chart Release the mouse button and give a double click on this rectangle Please find below an example of this zoom Menus 67 Moving the chart Press the key SHIFT and click with the cursor on the chart Maintain the mouse button compressed Move the cursor and the chart will move jointly Chart Menu To access the chart menu place the cursor and click with the right mouse button on the chart area Following menu will be displayed w Trace mouse coordinates y Axis Zoom Fit H Properties In this menu following operations can be executed Enable disable mouse coordinates Enable disable x and y axis Execute Fit to Screen operations Execute Fit to Window operations Open the box with the chart properties Figure below shows the box with the chart properties Ei 68 WLP V9 90 Properties General Coordinates range gl E p 0 0332 we 0 630631 p 0 6972 i Mouse coordinates W Anis Cancelar Ajuda In the box of the chart properties you can execute following operations Set manually the X and Y axis scale Enable disable the mouse coordinates
151. e coil is a Boolean element that transfers the value contained at its input to its output and stores the current value It can be used only as the last element of the logic FUNCTION BLOCK The Function Block FB is part of a packed control program that may be used in different parts of the same Weg Language 97 7 1 2 or in different programs The FB function block provides a software solution for some small problems such as for the creation of a timer pulse our it can provide a control fora larger part of an equipment or machine for example the control of a pressure valve Comparisons have been made between the FB and the objects present programming oriented by objects However this concept may be easily understood through the analogy with the hardware In many cases the FB can be compared with integrated circuits Function Block Integrated Circuit Input Parameters Output Parameters EN Boolean variable indicates if the operation defined by a function can be executed or not ENO Boolean variable indicates if the operations are executed successfully or not In short these Boolean inputs allow the power flow through the block Data Types Address Table PLC1 PLC2 POS2 SOFTPLC CFW 11 and SOFTPLC SSW 06 BOARDS PLC1 V2 0X PLC2 V1 5X POS2 V1 6X SOFTPLC V2 0X SOFTPLC V1 4X DATA TYPE CFW 09 CFW 09 SCA 05 CFW 11 SSW 06 First First Qty Last Qty Qty Qty Last Qt Retentive Bit 7MX1000 672
152. e data type may be constant user parameter word marker In value is given in percent OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block will not be executed and the ENO output keeps in 0 If the EN input is 1 the block compares the motor real speed and direction of rotation with the programmed speed plus hysteresis and the direction of rotation If the motor is running in the same direction of rotation as programmed and the motor speed is higher or equal to the programmed speed argument plus the hysteresis then the ENO output goes 1 Otherwise 0 is transfered to the ENO output 242 WLP V9 90 Weg Note that if there is a hysteresis greater than 0 the real speed should decrease below the programmed speed minus the hysteresis in order to deactivate the ENO output FLOWCHART INBAG Direction of rotation N direction of rotation programmed speed speed programmed CHART Ei Language 243 7 5 6 7 5 6 1 INBWG PROGRAM ED SPEED HYSTERESIS E s F i REAL SHEED EXAMPLE LA AL EN INBWG ENO DIRECTION SFEED HYSTERESIS ASIS The INBWG block will be activated while the digital input 1 is on In this case if the motor is running clockwise and its speed is higher or equal to 1530 rpm respecting the hysteresis it writes 1 to the digital output 1 Otherwise if the speed is less than 1470 rpm it writes 0 PLC TON SYMBOL IN T
153. e desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 1 3 POSITIONO ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Movement Control POSITIONO Edit Toolbar Pe FUNCTION Inserts a POSITIONO 151 element DESCRIPTION 46 WLP V9 90 Weg You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 Positioning 3 5 7 2 1 SCURVE ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning SCURVE Standard Toolbar E FUNCTION Inserts a S Curve 153 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 2 TCURVE ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Positioning TCURVE Standard Toolbar E FUNCTION Inserts a Trapezoidal Curve 156 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 2 3 HOME ACCESS Menu
154. e effective values In the figure below the master speed will be changed to 1000 rpm and we will analyze the cursor at the same position IT Eq Menus 65 Master Speed 1000 rpm Cursor Values Master 60312516 rot Slave 03275858 rot Speed 1576 751405 rpm Acceleration 88519 822218 rpm Jerk 31619871813 905342 PMS During the cam profile design all these values must be considered since they may or not be executed due to the mechanical electroelectronic limits of the installed equipment As the acceleration and the jerk charts are determined by considering the interpolation between two points at the junctions between the linear interpolations the acceleration and jerk will be displayed as zero However theoretically it is known that in a speed step the acceleration and jerk is infinitely variable In the practice the acceleration and jerk depends at this moment on the mechanical electrical and electronic limitations of the involved equipment These speed steps should be noted and considered in the cam profile design Figure below shows the condition as example CAM Edit lt tutor cpr gt ee 0 E i200 000000 0 000000 og a9 Ll 0000000 alela Pls Ali s a i I I Li i i I I 1 i i i I 1 i i I I Li i i I pa Li i I I I i i i I I Li i I 1 E E i ee q Bn ee de p Z E i i m o The CAM block has two different inter
155. e elements correctly left border and right border Warning C204 position value is very small Why In this condition the motor stays at the same position Action Fill the position with a value bigger than 360 65536 degrees Warning C205 encoder speed reference is zero it does not run Why The relationship between master and slave is zero Action program any value different from zero in the entire ratio and or program any value different from zero for the slave ratio Warning C206 division by 0 Why The divider of the math block is a float constant equal to 0 Action change data 2 to a value different from 0 If this change is not made the division result will be Weg Compiler 313 8 5 saturated to the maximum value Warning C207 Input address is equal to the output address Why The same variable was used at the input and at the output of the block Action Use different variables Informations A dialog Box gives information about the compiler program and files Information about the Compiler Here is shown the equipment project name date hour and elapsed time since the last compiling process Information about the Program Here is shown the number of pages logics and elements used in the user program Information about the Files Here is shown the name hour date a length of the files that have been generated during the last compilation Applications Applications in the WLP
156. e should be the same Configuration of WLP software is done in the Configurations option in the Communication menu Serial Communication Serial Port he Serial port ok Address 1 Baudrate Parity Number of data bits 8 Number of stop bits 1 one Figure Serial communication configuration box There are three basic configurations for the functioning of the communication I Port where the communication cable is connected between the computer and the board 2 Address of the board in the modbus net which should be the same as parameter of the board 3 Transmission tax Baud rate of the serial communication that should be the same as parameter of the board NOTE For the CFW 11 SoftPLC it is only necessary the installation of the USB 95 communication drive No CFW 11 configuration is necessary Once the configuration is done check if the communication cable is connected between the computer s port of the board Also check if the board is energized E To transfer the program click on the program transference button iol The following box will be displayed Ei Tutorial 331 Download Information Equipament PLC1 01 1 52 File Tukorl bin Size 318 Bytes Date 2203 2005 Time 11 18 57 Download user program Ter Ho Figure Download information box This box will display important information related to the program transference It displays thetarg
157. e the converter scaling control P202 0 1 or 2 with speed variation via board PLC it is necessary to rewrite the program according to what was displayed in the next figure l 2 5 4 5 T 8 a ENARLE DRIVE all WOO vM 2000 He Vol 3407 i 3 FEEDRACE OF ENABLE DRIVE MLE 407 i EN TRANSFER ENO W SET SPEED OF DEIVE BY P12 PARAMETER J M2002 vME3407 WSO PD121 G T FEEDBACE OF REAL SPEED ol S407 EI EN TRANSFER ENO L Figure Tutor6 In this new example theP801 user parameter content is transferred to the P121 drive parameter which is the reference through the converter keys The real speed is read fromthe P002 drive parameter This is themotor s real speed Converter enabling remains via PLC board Weg Tutorial 339 10 7 4 To execute this new program the following drive parameters should be adjusted P202 0 1 or 2 scaling control U F P220 0 always local P221 0 local reference via key P224 4 rotate stop local via PLC NOTA For CFW 09 with firmware version gt 3 70 do CFW 09 is possible to use de blocks SPEED SETSPEED for all controls Relative positioning with s curve and t curve Tutor To use positioning blocks it is mandatory that the converter is in vector control with encoder this is necessary because every positioning is based on position return given by the encoder For such adjust t
158. e the maximum allowed aa EXAMPLE Real Real 1 200 00 TM H6S501 1000 00 M Acceleration i KERK S07 1000 00 H Deceleration CommandAborted 096503 H Error f MX 5504 ErrorlD pr 4 MW 8400 Aborting MButterkMode Fusing MUpdatelvlode Teh T6506 Execute PAC Stop Done Real 300 00 H Deceleration WAS 507 TGNL5508 Aborting MButterkMode CommandSborted fr Desabilitado Error Desabilitado ErrorlD Desabilitado Lu Ei 144 WLP V9 90 vO MX6500 oOo nmn MX6501 oe Ls MX6502 EH Iii a MX6503 t t HIT 4 MN6504 fo LIMI gt vO MWS400 69 p TITT gt 5 Wo MA6S06 Loo Lr PP gt pm gt Wo MAGS Wo MAGS08 2HMX6509 25 SW2406 On ha ak Velocidade 200 In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6500 the MC Move Velocity block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the movement to reach the speed of 200 RPM starts The shaft status SW3406 changes from 2 Standstill to 5 Continuous Motion At the moment that the speed reaches 200 RPM the InVelocity output bit marker 6505 is set With the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6506 the MC Stop block is instantly executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6507 and 6508 respectively are set and the stop starts At the same time the Busy Active and InVe
159. eady to begin installing WLP VA on your computer Click Install to continue with the installation or click Back if you want to review or change any settings Destination location CW WheghWwLP VZ Setup type Full installation Selected components Main Files Help Files Project Examples Files Macro Files W SCAN Files Install Cancel Figure Confirmation of common or personal shortcut creation Thus the installer will create the WLP program shortcuts and will open a box with them accordingto the next figure Mame Size Type A Ajuda WLP v6 20 LEB Shortcut Ae Ajuda WSCAN 1 20 1KB Shortcut Se Help WLP v6 20 LEB Shortcut Ad Help WSCAN 1 20 1 KB Shortcut f Uninstall WLP v6 20 LEB Shortcut Wap VA 20 1KB Shortcut are WSCAN V1 20 LEB Shortcut Figure WLP software shortcuts Close this last window thus finishing the WLP software installation in your computer Executing the WLP Software To execute the WLP software go through the following path in the Windows start menu go tothe WEG program group In the subgroup of the WLP wished version click on the program s shortcut according to next figure Ei Tutorial 321 F Programs 2 Documents k Ajuda WLP VX VZ gt Settings pr 3 z w Ajuda WSCAN YH YZ ch a e Fa j Search gt W Help WLP VX YZ a AM Help WSCAN YYZ x Help and Support jE Uninstall WLP vx YZ A WLP We sje Run ke Ba WSR Wis YZ
160. ectangle will be displayed on the chart Release the mouse button and give a double click on this rectangle Please find below an example of this zoom Language 179 Moving the chart Press the key SHIFT and click with the cursor on the chart Maintain the mouse button compressed Move the cursor and the chart will move jointly Chart Menu To access the chart menu place the cursor and click with the right mouse button on the chart area Following menu will be displayed w Trace mouse coordinates y Axis Zoom Fit H Properties In this menu following operations can be executed Enable disable mouse coordinates Enable disable x and y axis Execute Fit to Screen operations Execute Fit to Window operations Open the box with the chart properties Figure below shows the box with the chart properties Ei 180 WLP V9 90 Properties General Coordinates range gl E pl 0 0332 g 0 630631 ye 0 6972 W Mouse coordinates PORTE Cancelar Ajuda In the box of the chart properties you can execute following operations Set manually the X and Y axis scale Enable disable the mouse coordinates Enable disable the X and Y axis 7 5 2 6 CALCCAM SYMBOL EN CALCCAN ENO DESCRIPTION It is composed by I EN input and 1 ENO output The EN input is responsible for the block enabling The ENO output informs the instant when the block is finish
161. ed The CALCCAM block is responsible for the calculable CAM 167 blocks calculation the CAM block profile type defined as calculable according to the argument contents of these CAM blocks OPERATION When the EN input changes from 0 to 1 the block is executed By finishing the calculable CAM blocks calculation the ENO output changes to I during 1 scan cycle returning later to 0 NOTE At the first scan cycle after the download of the user program the CALCCAM block loads de number of points the values of the points and the interpolation types for the programmed arguments in the calculable CAM blocks EXAMPLE Ladder Ei Language 181 H0X1 EN TRANSFER ENO SRC OST EN JOG ENO ROTATION 00 ON Clockwise Poll Wa00 SPEED SoU W801 ACCELERATION Virtual HASIS SIT SS MA 000 EN CAM ENO PROFILE TYFE old VohEL2001 EN CALCCAMN ENO CAM block properties tow Oper Create Save r Remove Cam Profile Type C Fixed Calculable Maxinun Number of Points Constant 3 First Master Point Float Marker 9500 Tag First Slave Point Float Marker 3503 Tag First Curve Type Bit Marker 1000 Tag Number of Points aw Marcador de word 5000 Tag Range 1 700 Cancel Help CAM profile 182 WLP V9 90 Weg M CAM Edit lt toy cpr gt Seles tm a l Ma
162. ed rpm revolutions per minute Y Acceleration pms revolutions per minute por second z Jerk pms revolutions per minute por square second Time ms milizeconds OK Cancel Figure Constant unit box Those unit configurations are only valid for Constant positioning parameters When positioning parameters are used with word markers or user s parameters positioning units are fixed position rotations speed rpm acceleration rpm s and jerk rpm s When activating digital input 2 the board will position the motor according to parameters of Position Speed Acceleration and Mode in Curve with t profile The next figure below shows the simulator of the t curve which is in the property box of the t curve Position Speed Acceleration Mode Simulator Frogramed values Cursor values Position 5 rot Position 2483 rot Speed 1000 rpm Speed 231 541 pm Accel 180 rpm Accel 180 000 rpm Cursor 1 286 s eee I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I I OK Cancelar Ajuda Figure Simulator of t curve IT Eq Tutorial 343 10 7 5 In this example the t curve was programmed with position of 5 rotations with speed equal to 1000rpm acceleration equal to 180 rpm s One can observe the several curves with their variants during the time where position is in red speed in black ac
163. een programmed in the moving arguments When the speed is equal to zero the output ENO changes to 0 Please find below more details about the block diagram flow chart graph and example Weg Language BLOCK DIAGRAM ROTATION SPEED REFERENCE OFFSET FLOWCHART SPEED E Was it being executed Y Is this the block Is there any movement active It executes the block ENO ENO 0 CHART 219 Ei 220 WLP V9 90 EXAMPLE era EN TRANSFER ENO OED EH LES HROTATION ol WSO H SPEED ol WS0 H OFFSET oll Weld ACCELERATION ol Weds MDECELERAT ION Feal WASIS EHO The digital input IX1 enables the drive The digital input IX2 enables the block SPEED which through its direction of rotation speed offset acceleration and deceleration parameters will generate a speed reference for the effective axis 7 5 3 4 REF SYMBOL Weg Language 221 DESCRIPTION It is composed by 1 EN input 1 ENO output and the 3 following arguments MODE Control Mode 117 SPEED Speed 115 TORQUE Torque Current 118 The EN input is responsible for enabling the block and for sending the run stop command to the drive The ENO output informs that the block is enabled and being executed The REF block is responsible for writing the speed reference or the torque c
164. elative 189 MC MoveVelocity 223 Added Velocity et Na e Deceleration arguments for the following block of the SCA06 MC Phasing 23 New float system markers and double system markers of the SCA 06 108 Added encoder inputs ER the EEN1 and EEN2 accessory for following SCA06 blocks MC Camin 20 MC Gearin 230 MC GearlnPos 234 Added signed variable option in trend of variables dialog Correction of V8 90 functional deviations SDO block did not work properly for the retentive markers of the SCA06 could use incorrect values in its execution Conversion of unit speed rps was incorrect WLP V8 90 Included new equipments CFW701 CT W900 WLP V8 81 Correction of V8 80 functional deviations Correction in identification of equipment and or versions of the equipment in download which could lead to improper requests for changes to equipment WLP V8 80 Included V4 0X of SRWO1 PTC and SRWO1 RCD Included VE2 50 of VE3 90 and CFW11 WLP V8 71 16 WLP V9 90 Weg New applications for CFW11 Crane horizontal and vertical motion Center winder via dancer load cell or motor torque Correction of V8 70 functional deviations Compilation error of block USERFB for CFW700 this error make the program incompatible with these equipments Error on loading aplications in spanish language no aplication was loaded in this situation WLP V8 70 Included new equipments SSW7000 CFW5
165. er position of a point is smaller than the position of the master of the previous point at the moment of the CALCCAM block execution this CAM profile will not be executed again if the CALCCAM block is not executed again with the use of the correct contents of the 168 WLP V9 90 Weg markers e First Slave Point It is a float marker that configures the position of the slave of the first point of this CAM profile the position of the slave of the other points will be according to the contents of the float markers subsequent to the selected one The contents of the used float markers must have the format of turns for instance 1 5 turns 0 25 turn e First Curve Type It is a bit marker that configures the interpolation type 0 for linear interpolation and 1 for cubic interpolation of the first point of this CAM profile The interpolation type of the other points will be according to the contents of the bit markers subsequent to the selected one e Number of Points It is a word marker that configures the quantity of points of this CAM profile NOTES If the programmed word marker contains a value bigger than the Maximum Number of Points argument at the moment of the CALCCAM block execution this CAM profile will not be executed anymore if the CALCCAM block is not executed with the correct contents of the used marker At the first scan cycle after the user program download the CALCCAM block loads the number
166. er value is incremented exception if the R input is I When the counter value reaches the preset value output Q changes to 1 and remains at this status till R output changes to 1 While R input is 1 the counter value is reset and the counting is not incremented FLOWCHART N Y N increment previous_CUSU counter value N reset counter value did reach the present value CHART Weg Language 249 C cu CTU EXAMPLE Moll oll 2000 SoM E2000 vaal M1000 EN TCURWE ENO Maloga Positivo H SIGN POSITION SIT WEOO SI WSO MPOSITION 1000 0 4 SPEED 10000 0 M ACCELERATION Relativo M MODE Feal ol 1 O00 bl Mola SO tok wangi If there is a transition from 0 to 1 at the digital input or the bit marker 1000 is 1 and the digital output I is 0 a TCURVE positioning is enabled After conclusion marker 1000 changes to 1 thus enabling the CTU block to make a counting and starting again the positioning if the digital input 2 is 0 After the counter has 250 WLP V9 90 en detected 50 positive transitions in the marker 1000 i e it has executed 50 positionings the digital output 1 changes to 1 and makes impossible a new positioning before the digital input 2 is 1 thus resetting the output 1 7 5 6 4 PID SYMBOL REFMANUAL FEEDBACK TYPE OPT DESCRIPTION This block is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 3 argumen
167. eration as a network master It is necessary to program in product configurations the operation mode as Master besides the communication rate parity and stop bits which must be the same for the whole equipment in the network The Modbus RTU network master does not have an address so the address configured in the PLC300 is not used Sending and receiving telegrams via RS485 interface using the Modbus RTU is programmed by 282 WLP V9 90 Weg using blocks in ladder programming language It is necessary to know the available blocks and the ladder programming software in order to be able to program the network master e The following functions are available for the sending of requisitions by the Modbus master o Function 01 Read Coils o Function 02 Read Discrete Inputs o Function 03 Read Holding Registers o Function 04 Read Input Registers o Function 05 Write Single Coil o Function 06 Write Single Register o Function 15 Write Multiple Coils o Function 16 Write Multiple Registers 7 5 10 2 MB_ReadBinary Block that performs a reading of up to 128 binary data via Read Coils or Read Discrete Inputs of a slave on the Modbus RTU network Execute ME ReadBinary Slave Address Function InitialData Address humberOfData Timeout Offset Block Structure Name Description O OO Operation When this block detects a leading edge on Execute it checks whether the Modbus slave RTU in specified address i
168. erent from REG after the 2 INDEX this error is not fatal 0 no error 1 INDEX received after PF WIN 2 IPF REGI gt WIN after receiving 2 INDEX initialization SH 0 normal 1 a positive correction is required SH 0 normal 1 a negative correction is required DIFF IPF REGI in pulses REG number of pulses between 2 INDEX PUL number of pulses detected after the last INDEX MC Gearin SYMBOL Execute ML Gearln InlGear RatioMumerator RatioDenominator Acceleration CommandAborted Deceleration Error Error ButterMiode DESCRIPTION It executes the synchronism in speed between the programmed shafts When there is a transition from 0 to 1 in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments Weg Language 231 For the slave shaft to reach the speed of the master shaft a movement will be performed with an acceleration deceleration configured in the Acceleration and Deceleration arguments Once the synchronism is established the InGear output is set The movement direction will depend on the signal of the RatioNumerator If RatioNumerator is greater than zero the movement will be in the same direction as the master shaft and if the RatioNumerator is smaller than zero the movement will be in the opposite the direction of the master shaft It order to finish the block it is necessary the execution of another block or the changing of the
169. es I in the bit marker 1000 Otherwise writes 0 Coils COIL SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Consists of I input and I argument The argument comprises one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the current value is not saved in the ERPROM memory i e the last value is not recovered In addition the even values correspond to 0 or false and the odd ones correspond to I Weg Language 133 7 4 2 or true OPERATION Transfers the signal contained in its input to its argument CHART Me COIL SAMPLE MX1000 If the bit marker 2000 or the digital input I is 1 writes I in the bit marker 1000 Otherwise writes 0 NEG COIL SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Consists of I input and I argument The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the current value is not saved in the ERPROM memory i e the last value is not restored In addition the even values correspond to 0 and the odd ones correspond to 1 OPERATION It transfers the negated signal contained in its input to its argument CHART 134 Ei WLP V9 90 7 4 3 P NEGATED COIL SAMPLE MN2000 UWBO0D OX1 IX If the bit marker 2000 or the digital input I is 1 and the user p
170. eset the bit markers 6501 and 6502 are also reset MC FinishHoming SYMBOL Execute ML FinishHoming DESCRIPTION It changes the shaft status from Homing to Standstill When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be executed and the shaft status will change from Homing to Standstill The Done output goes to 1 during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 4 arguments which are Axis 118 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished OPERATING MODE In the execution of the block if the shaft status is Homing the shaft status will change to StandStll otherwise it will remain in the current status m gt g Language 205 BLOCK ERRORS Error ee P202 different from 4 PLC Status of the Drive different from Homing 7 5 2 15 MC CamTableSelect SYMBOL Execute MO CamTableSelect CamTable CamTable Periodic Busy Error ErrorlC CamTablelD DESCRIPTION Select a point table of a CAM curve previously programmed through the CAM PROFILES tool In order to use the MC Camln block a point table must be selected through the MC CamTableSelect block or the point table must be calculated through the MW CamCalc block When there is
171. et equipment connected via serial the file s name to be transferred as well as the date and time it was compiled To transfer the program click Yes The transfer will be started It should be very clear that during the program transference the board will not be active thus not executing any program If there are linked outputs or the converter is enabled they will be unlinked and the converter will be disabled During program transference the following box will be displayed Download 33 Transfering user program 02 0 de 318 Bytes Cancel Figure Download status box This box displays the program s transference status which when finalized will display the following message J Success in transfering of user program Figure Success box in program transference If the transference occurred successfully the board will start executing the new user s program Note Parameter P763 of the board has the function of disabling the user s program For the program to be normally executed it should be in zero 332 WLP V9 90 Weg 10 6 Monitoring a Ladder Program Tutor1 19 step With the program running on the board it can be monitored on the computer s screen After compilation and transference of the program on the board it is possible to monitor the ladder by pressing the on line monitoring button PP At this moment the WLP will try to establish a communication with the board by
172. eter were defined on the creation assistant If it is necessary to change the USERFB configuration defined through the creation assistant use the USERFB menu to access the available options as presented on the following figure Macro Window Help Configuration Ctrl M 3 4 5 T Information CtrlH Shift M The option Configuration opens the following window 300 Ei WLP V9 90 Macro configuration Double click in the line to modify PASSWORD DISABLE Number of inputs 2 Number of outputs 1 Click directly to modify Parameter T ppe 0 BOOLEAN 1 BOOLEAN 16 BOOLEAN Cancel Help It is possible to perform the following operations by using this option e Activate Deactivate the USERFB password by directly clicking on the option ACTIVE INACTIVE PASSWORD e Change the number of input output parameters by directly clicking on the number of inputs outputs e Change the parameter type by directly clicking on the type e Change the parameter name by directly clicking on the parameter name The option Information opens the following window ma WLP Edit RETEM BLOCK INPUT PARAMETERS PO 0N ONE SHOT TURN ON THE OUTPUT P1 OFF ONE SHOT TURN OFF THE OUTPUT OUTPUT PARAMETERS P16 QOUT OUTPUT English i Cancel Weg Language 301 It is possible in this window to write in a simplified way a tex
173. figure you must click with the mouse on the position indicated by means of the next figure and the variable value monitoring box will appear al 1 ol 2001 MX 2000 l oll wengi ET h oll wengi 0 vol oh x 2001 al 2000 l 2 The monitoring box can be placed in any place in the ladder editing window therefore it is necessary only to click on the box and while the mouse key is pressed to drag it to the desired position oll WOOO Figure Monitoring box repositioned To delete the monitoring box click on it select it and then press key DEL ol WG 000 Figure Monitoring box selected Undo the selection by clicking on ESC In order to change the monitoring format click on it with the mouse right button so that the following menu shows up 82 Ei WLP V9 90 5 5 5 6 ol WOOO w Signed Mot Signed w Decimal Hexadecimal Binary Figure Format menu It is possible to choose the following options in that menu With signal Without signal Decimal Hexadecimal Binary It is also possible to select the format for all the monitoring boxes of the current page therefore verify in the option Menu Communication Online Monitoring Configuration Ladder Variable Write When online monitoring is active you can write values in variables of the type bit marker word markers float markers system bit markers
174. g 20 IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Force Inputs Outputs ACCESS Menu Communication Force Inputs Outputs Ni Communication Toolbar FUNCTION Open a dialog that shows the Force Inputs Outputs 91 IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 General Information ACCESS Menu Communication General Information Communication Toolbar o FUNCTION Open a dialog that shows the General Information 93 IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Config ACCESS Menu Communicate Config Hot Key Shift F8 FUNCTION Configures the communication Menus 73 Communication Configuration Part Seral port Ok Address Baudrate Parity No Number of data bits 8 Number of stop bits 1 Port COM1 to COM8 and USB 3 9 User Block 3 9 1 Configuration ACCESS Menu User Block Configuration Hot Key Ctrl M FUNCTION Change the configuration of the USERFB that is being edited DESCRIPTION Through this menu it is possible to change the configurations that were previously stored during the USERPFB creation wizard 3 9 2 Information ACCESS Menu User Block Information Hot Key Ctrl Shift M FUNCTION Change the information about the USERFB that is being edited DESCRIPTION Through this menu it is possible to change the information that appears when info button is pressed in the USERFB properties box
175. g feature Ei Monitoring 85 AO WLP Variables Trend File Graph Help I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 19 41 33 000 13 41 45 000 93 42 03 000 19 42 15 000 19 42 33 000 Color Symbol Type Address Min Cursor val Actual val A All configurations related to the variable trend are in the Graphic menu as shown below Start Trend w Stop Trend Co Pause Trend Lun T Disable Read Cicle Correction Configure Variable 1 Variable 2 Variable 3 variable 4 variable 5 variable 6 The variable trend has a slight different operation when compared with the other ones mentioned above For using this Trend proceed as follows 1 Configure the graphic through the option Configure 2 Configure the Variables to be plotted through the options Variable I to 6 3 Start the Trend trough the option Start Trend TREND CONFIGURATION 86 Ei WLP V9 90 WLP Trend Configuration Trend Time Base Read Cicle DE Second s l Cancel Trend Axis Scale BO Second 2 In this dialog box you can select the variable read cycle which corresponds to the time interval between each reading of the selected variables The scale of the X shaft corresponds to the time that is available for the graphic visualization VARIABLES CONFIGURE Insert Variable pe Address OO Symbol Minin OO Masimun ma Cancel Remove Select in this dialog box the Type Ad
176. gnal is set remaining is this state until the end of the block ACTIVE Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Active signal informs if the block is in execution The data type of the Active can be e disabled bit marker e digital output When the block is executed the Active signal is set remaining is this state until the end of the block If the block is in the Aborting mode or no other block is in execution the Active and Busy signals will have the same signal COMMAND ABORTED Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Command Aborted signal informs if the block was aborted canceled The data type of the CommandAborted can be e disabled bit marker e digital output If the block started and has not finished yet its movement Busy signal set and another block with the Aborting mode is executed the CommandAborted signal is set and remains while the Executive input is in 1 The Active and Busy signals are reset ERROR Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Error signal informs if an error occurred in the attempt to execute the block The data type of the Error can be e disabled bit marker e digital output If an error occurs in the attempt to execute the block the Error signal is set and remains while the Executive input is in 1 ERROR ID Used in the MC blocks Movement Control While the Error signal is set the ErrorId will contain the error code The data type of the ErrorId can be e d
177. ha Cunfiguration Wizard Send values now Old methodology In this case it is also possible the transmission of only the parameter values according to the figure below Download Parameter Tag W Parameter Values For more details on the application refer to the respective Application Guide available on the CD that comes with the product Tutorial General Resume Tutorial Installing the WLP Software 317 Executing the WLP Software 320 Monitoring a Ladder Program Tutorl 332 Examples of User s Programs On Off via buttons Tutor2 and Tutor3 334 On Off via user s parameters Tutor4 335 Enable disable drive and control speed Tutor5 and Tutor6 336 Tutorial 317 10 2 Installing the WLP Software The WLP software can be obtained from the WEG web site http www weg net downloads and online systems When the WLP installer is downloaded it will be in a ZIP format compacted file One must extract this file to a temporary folder and then run the installation setup This extraction can be done by means of software like for instance the 7zip that can be found on the web site http www 7 zip org or the WinZip software that is on the web site http www winzip com After extracting the files will appear in the temporary folder The WLP X YZ setup exe file is the WLP installer Double click it in order to run it Mame Size Type mlp X 42 setup exe 7 174KEB Application Fig
178. hat the zero machine position has been reached The ENO output informs the moment when the block has been finished TYPE Standard It starts with a trapezoidal profile When the signal in ZEROSW goes to 1 the block reaches the marker In this moment the block stop and come back to the marker position Speed 1 2 1 ZEROSW sensor detected Posit 2 Null pulse position detected sd 3 Stopped position Zero machine NOTE If the ZEROSW input was enable when the block starts it run in opposite direction until ZEROSW goes to 1 After this it changes its direction and will have the original behaviour Immediate In this case the moviment are not executated and the current position is considerated the zero machine 160 Ei WLP V9 90 Speed 1 Zero machine position Position NOTE In this option this block can be executated without the drive is enabled It also can be executated during some other positioning function Uni Diretional with Sensor This type can be used when the marker is not available and only one direction is required It starts an trapezoidal profile When the switch ZEROSW was detected this current position was considerated the zero machine and the block starts its decceleration until stop If the ZEROSW input was enabled the current position was considerated like zero machine and it was not generated the moviment speed 1 ZEROSW sensor detected zero machine 2 Stopped posit
179. he HMI If it was a fault and the block is disabled the fault will not be removed from the HMI It will be necessary to reset the drive in this case Note If another alarm fault were active when activating the block this user alarm fault will not overwrite the active alarm fault COMMENTED EXAMPLE ML 6200 NK6201 EN USERERR ENO When the bit marker MX6200 is 1 the alarm 950 will be generated at the drive HMI with the message Fan I Overload CAN Network MSCANWEG SYMBOL EN MSCANWEG ENO SPEED SRC Aes DESCRIPTION This block is constituted by I input EN 1 output ENO and 2 arguments as follows Speed Source informs which speed value the CAN WEG Master will transmit to the slaves the real speed or the speed reference Axis define what axis is transmit to slave real or virtual The input EN is responsible for enabling the master to transmit the speed and real position references to the slaves connected in the CAN network The output ENO informs if the CAN network is enabled OPERATION When the block is enabled it cyclically transmits the speed and real position references through CAN network NOTE If the block is not enabled on the master the slave will not follow the master Weg Language 279 7 5 9 2 7 5 9 3 SAMPLE ol L000 ol 1001 EN MSCANIEG ENO SFEED SRC AAIS When the bit register MX1000 is ON the board will cyclically transmit the speed and real po
180. he block is executed the Done output bit marker 8001 is set and remains in I while the Execute input bit marker 8000 is set In this example the bit marker 8001 ensures that the MC Camln block will not be active before the MC_CamTableSelect block is executed successfully 7 5 2 16 MW CamCalc SYMBOL Execute hw CambCalc humberDfR oints hlasterFoints SlaveFoints Curve Type CamT ablelD Periodic Table DESCRIPTION It calculates a points table of the CAM curve m gt g Language 207 When there is a transition from 0 to 1 in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments When the point table is available the Done output goes to 1 during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of 1 Execute input 1 Done output and 13 arguments which are Master 118 Slave 118 Number Of Points 126 Master Points 127 Slave Points 127 Curve Type 127 Periodic 127 Table 126 Busy 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Cam Table ID 126 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished BLOCK ERRORS Invalid position of the master shaft The position of the master shaft must be greater than the position of the previous point EXAMPLE EE MW CamCalc block in execution Is only allowed the execution of a MC CamCalc b
181. he composition of two words where the high word represents the most significant 16 bits of the double Word and the low word represents the less significant 16 bits of the double word as follows SENGS 31 z 16 15 p 0 DOUBLE WORD WORD HIGH WORD LOW Hence in order to create a double word it is necessary to have two distinct words The composition of these two words can be determined by the following rules Positive Numbers 0 lt HIGH WORD lt 32767 266 Ei WLP V9 90 HIGH WORD INTEGER DOUBLE WORD 65536 LOW WORD DOUBLE WORD HIGH WORD x 65536 Or DOUBLE WORD HIGH WORD x 65536 LOW WORD Example DOUBLE WORD 500 000 HIGH WORD INTEGER 500 000 65536 7 LOW WORD 500 000 7 x 65536 41248 DOUBLE WORD 7 x 65536 41248 500 000 Negative Numbers 32768 lt HIGH WORD lt 65535 HIGH WORD INTEGER DOUBLE WORD 65536 65535 LOW WORD DOUBLE WORD HIGH WORD 65536 65536 Or DOUBLE WORD HIGH WORD 65535 x 65536 LOW WORD 65536 Example DOUBLE WORD 325 000 HIGH WORD INTEGER 325 000 65536 65535 65531 LOW WORD 325 000 65531 65536 x 65536 2680 DOUBLE WORD 65531 65535 x 65536 2680 65536 325 000 SAMPLES Sample 1 ol I ODO EN IMT2FL ENO rom EN INMT2FL ENO ol 1001 123 0000000 vok LOD 661 0000000 EN MATH ENO ol FSO00 W DATA 1 RESULT OPERATOR el
182. he following converter parameters P202 4 vector control with encoder P220 0 always local P221 11 local reference via PLC P224 4 rotate stop local via PLC 340 WLP V9 90 Weg J 0 l 2 3 4 5 T B ENABLE DEIVE FEEDBACE OF ENABLE DRIVE 25 Wed oll 2000 KA vol 4 i ti 3 EN TRANSFER ENO vad HSRC DST Moh S002 NLA 407 RELATIVE POSITIONING WITH 5 FROFILE AND T PROFILE voll vok 2002 vok 2003 H EN SCURWE ENO Positive H SIGM POSITION 3 IT WEOL UWE02 H POSITION 1000 0 4 SPEED 180 0 ACCELERATION 3 500 0 4 JERK Relative H MODE Feal MAXIS 10 Vole vM 2002 oll 2004 FA SJ EN TCURWE ENG Positive M SIGH POSITION 12 AU WSO I W802 W POSITION 1000 0 H SPEED 180 0 H ACCELERATION 13 Relative H MODE Feal MAXIS 14 Figure Tutor7 Functioning Converter enabling is done in the same way as displayed on Tutor5 When activating digital input 1 the board will position the motor according to parameters of Position Speed Acceleration Jerk and Mode in Curve with s profile The figure below shows the simulator of the s curve which is in the property box of the s curve Ei Tutorial 341 Position Speed Acceleration Jerk Mode Simulator Frogramed values Cursor values Position 5 rot Position 2 400 rot Speed 1000 rpm Speed 201 957 pm Accel 180 rpm Accel 14 915 rpm
183. he status bar 3 5 6 6 NTS COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils NTS COIL Edit Toolbar h l FUNCTION Inserts a negative transition coil 137 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar IT Eq Menus 45 3 5 6 7 IMMEDIATE COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils IMMEDIATE COIL Edit Toolbar ar FUNCTION Inserts a immediate coil 197 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 Function Blocks 3 5 7 1 Movement Control 3 5 7 1 1 STOP ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Movement Control STOP Edit Toolbar f FUNCTION Inserts a Stop 146 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 1 2 QSTOP ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Movement Control QSTOP Edit Toolbar 2 FUNCTION Inserts a Quick Stop 150 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on th
184. hich the block is executed ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 5 arguments which are Slaven Busy 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the MC Camln block is finished OPERATING MODE When the MC_CamOut block is executed the drive does not operate in position grid In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Continuous Motion BLOCK ERRORS Error ans Id 67 Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status 73 Drive is not in the Synchronized Motion status 78 MC block not executed Internal fault P202 different from 4 PLC Weg Language 213 7 5 3 7 5 3 1 Movement SETSPEED SYMBOL EN SETSPEED ENO ROTATION SPEED ACCELERATION AAIS DESCRIPTION The block is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 4 arguments being speed 119 acceleration 115 axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The output ENO informs when the motor speed reaches the programmed speed OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block is not executed and the ENO output remains at 0 If the EN input changes from 0 to I and no other movement block is active exception the block Set Speed a trapezoidal profile is executed based on the characteristics programmed in the arguments and will not be finished unless a STOP bl
185. input bit marker 6505 is set 7 5 2 10 MC_StepAbsSwitch SYMBOL Execute ML StepAbsSwitch Direction Swibe hl ode Velocity CommandAborted Error ErrorlD DESCRIPTION It executes the search of the position of the AbsSwitch OTF Ong Of AbsSwitch l MOVING PART LimitSwitch n om or on LimitSwitch When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments The AbsSwitch can only be connected to digital inputs 1 2 or 3 seeing that the programmed function of the digital input must be in accordance with the SwitchMode argument If SwitchMode is configured as MC EdgeOn leading edge the function of the digital input P0300 P0301 or P0302 must be store position leading edge option 8 If the SwitchMode is configured as MC EdgeOff falling edge the function of the digital input P0300 P0301 or P0302 must be store position falling edge option 9 AbsSwitch will be considered the first digital input configured according to SwitchMode from digital input 1 If no digital inputs are configured according to SwitchMode error 77 will occur in the block and it will not be executed If when searching the AbsSwitch position the LitmitSwitch position is reached the movement will change direction up to the AbsSwitch position The search will be executed with the speed configured in the Velocity argument and a
186. integer word equal to 32767 If the float value is lower than 32768 its value is saturated in the conversion resulting in an integer word equal to 32768 EXAMPLE IX hIX2000 EN FLZINT ENO FLOAT 3 142 000 276 WLP V9 90 Weg When the digital input 1 is 1 the value of the constant 3 14 is converted to the user parameters 800 where the parameter 800 will be 3 7 5 8 4 IDATA SYMBOL READ WRITE EN IDATA EHO DATATYPE VALUE ADDRESS EN IDATA ENO DATATYPE ADDRESS VALUE DESCRIPTION It has 1 EN input 1 ENO output and 3 arguments mode read write index value The EN input enables the block The ENO output inform 1f the index is valid Index It has 2 data types and 1 address The data type of address can be constant word marker user parameter The data type to be read or wrotten can be bit marker word marker float marker system marker digital input digital output analog input analog output user parameter system parameter drive parameter Value It has I data type and 1 address The data type can be bit marker word marker float marker digital input digital output anal gica input Weg Language 277 anal gica output usu rio parameter sistema parameter drive parameter FUNCTION If the read mode was programmed and the EN input was enabled the value on index addrex will be the
187. ion Position Uni Diretional with Sensor and Null Pulse This type can be used when the switch and the marker on encoder were available and only one direction is required It starts an trapezoidal profile When the switch ZEROSW was detected it enabled to reach the marker When the marker was detected this current position was considerated the zero machine and the block starts its decceleration until stop speed 1 ZEROSW sensor detected 2 Null pulse detected zero machine 3 Stopped position Position Uni Diretional with Null Pulse This type can be used when the marker on encoder was available and only one direction is required When the marker was detected this current position was considerated the zero machine and the block starts its decceleration until stop Speed 1 Null pulse detected zero machine 1 2 Stopped position F Position Bi Diretional with Sensor This type can be used when the marker is not available It starts with a trapezoidal profile until reach the marker Then it makes that the motor invert its direction and it analises when the switch goes to O and this position will be the zero machine Then it makes that the motor deccelerate and come back to the zero machine position Weg Language 161 If the block was enabled and the ZEROSW 1 the moviment run in the opositte direction until the ZEROSW 0 This position will be considerated the zero machine Then the blo
188. ioning of 100 revolutions is completed 7 5 1 6 QSTOP SYMBOL EN BSTOP ENO DESCRIPTION It has 1 EN input I ENO output and 4 arguments deceleration 115 position 1141 control 117 axis 116 The EN input enables the block The ENO output inform the instant that the movement was finalized FUNCTION If the EN input was 0 the block is not active and the ENO output is 0 If the EN input goes to 1 the block is enabled When the board detect a pulse in quickly input and the position elapsed was reached it starts a stop When the stop was finalized the ENO output goes to I during a scan cycle Other movement can only be started if this block was disabled after finished Quickly Input marker of encoder 8 pin of X8 conector to POS2 or 8 pin of XC9 conector to PLC1 and PLC2 Weg Language 151 Important This block do not change the control format keeping the position loop or speed loop CHART FAST INPUT o ENO EXAMPLE KI MX2000 EN TCURWE ENDO Fositio HW SIGN POSITION 10 00 MW POSITION ol W amp 00O H SPEED SM Wado ACCELERATION Felatr o M MODE Real HASIS vole MX 2001 EN BSTOP ENO tre ADD 5 00 Automatica Real When the digital input I is 1 a 10 turn positioning will be enabled If the digital input 2 is 1 a fast stop block will be enabled passed 5 turns when a pulse occurs at the X8 fast input the positioning will be canceled When stop
189. is responsible for block enabling The output ENO will be on while the block is executed The USERFB block is responsible for executing a ladder subroutine that was created by the user USERFB parameters are memory areas that are used by the main program which calls the USERFB to interact with subroutines programmed inside the USERFB They can be of the following types BOOLEAN WORD e FLOAT The following table shows the objects that can be used for each type of USERFB parameter Type of USERFB Parameter Inputs Inputs Outputs PMO a PM15 PM16 a PM31 BOOLEAN MX Bit Marker MX Bit Marker 1X Digital Input QX Digital Output Ei Language 295 WORD Constant UW User Parameter UW User Parameter MW Word Marker 7 MW Word Marker QW Analog Output IW Analog Input FLOAT Float Constant MF Float Marker ME Float Marker FUNCTION If the input EN is off the output arguments PM16 to PM31 are not changed If the input EN is on the content of the arguments PMO to PM31 is copied to the memory area corresponding to the USERFB parameters PM After that the ladder subroutine is called and executed and the content of the USERFB parameters PM16 to PM31 is copied to the corresponding arguments FLOWCHART USERFB PRAIO to PRIS arguments P16 to FMS are copied to the memory arguments are area not changed Execute the subroutine PIl to PMII content is c
190. isabled Weg Language 129 e word marker e user parameter For further information on errors occurred refer to the BLOCK ERRORS table Retentive Block With the Retentive Block option selected the internal variables of the block will be saved in retentive memory thus the status of the block will remain the same after resetting restarting the drive 7 1 6 Quick reference LOGIC MOVEMENT BLOCKS SETSPEED Set Speed 213 218 SPEED Speed 21 JOG Move 216 REF Send Reference 22 STOP BLOCKS ae QSTOP Quick Stopls GEAR BOX BLOCKS FOLLOW Follower 227 AUTOREG Automatic Register 228 VERIFY BLOCKS INBWG In Motion 247 PLC BLOCKS TON Timer 245 RTC Real Time Clock 246 CTU Incremental Counter 247 PID PID Control 250 FILTER First Order Filter 253 Ei 130 WLP V9 90 CTENC Encoder Counter 255 CALCULATION BLOCKS TRANSFERENCE BLOCKS TRANSFER Transfer 273 INT2EL Integer to Float Conversion 274 FL2INT Float to Integer Conversion 275 Indi 276 USERERR User Error 277 CAN NETWORK BLOCKS MSCANWEG CANWEG Master 278 RXCANWEG Read CANWEG 279 OTHER BLOCKS USEREB Subroutine 208 MMC Multimotor Control 307 TEXT Comment 130 7 2 Texto 7 2 1 Comment DESCRIPTION To change the comment double click with the mouse left button on the comment line Type the new text and confirm with OK See 42 how
191. ith the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar Transference 3 5 7 8 1 TRANSFER ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Transference TRANSFER Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a Transfer 273 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 8 2 FL2INT ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Transference FL2INT f Standard Toolbar fr FUNCTION Inserts a Float to Integer 275 element DESCRIPTION IT Eq Menus 55 You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 8 3 INT2FL ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks Transference INT2FL Standard Toolbar HF FUNCTION Inserts an Integer to Float 274 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status
192. ition control is enabled The axis is allocated at the current position recorded by the encoder EXAMPLE IN 5X3001 P _ Peo I 000 oLX2 Poli S OD EN POSITIONS ENO MINSPEED aar 3000 LX TNL5000 0 3pead 100 13btits 0 Cuando la entrada digital 1 es 1 el comando Ejecutar SoftPLC SX3001 esta activo Si el inversor SX3000 esta habilitado hay dos situaciones weg Language 153 7 5 2 7 5 2 1 Si la entrada digital 2 es 0 el bloque POSITIONO esta activado y se activa tan pronto como la referencia pis en 13 bits de la unidad es menor o igual que la velocidad minima configurada Si la entrada digital 2 es 1 el POSITIONO bloque esta desactivada y el bloque REF esta habilitada para una referencia de velocidad de 100 rpm Positioning SCURVE SYMBOL EN SCURWE SIGH POSITION POSITION SPEEO ACCELERATION JERK MODE AAIS ENO DESCRIPTION It is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 6 arguments as follows position 14 speed Jerk 115 nS mode 116 axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output goes to 1 when the move has finished OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block will not be executed and the ENO output keeps in 0 If EN is activated for at least one scan cycle and there is no other active movement block a positioning with S profile will be executed based on the arguments programmed
193. ject For the user parameters and word markers the unit to be considered for this field is the RPM s rotation per minute per second square MODE The mode is always constant There are two options relative absolute In relative mode it refers to a positioning starting from its last position In this case the direction of rotation of this positioning is given by the signal 1 e clockwise direction of rotation when positive and counterclockwise direction of rotation when negative The absolute mode refers to the machine zero position but this zero position may be used only when a zero search HOME block has been executed previously DIRECTION OF ROTATION It has I data type and 1 address The data type can be constant bit marker digital input user parameter When the data type was constant we have the following options clockwise counter clockwise DIRECTION It has 1 data type and 1 address The data type can be constant bit marker digital input user parameter When the data type was constant we have the following options opposite same AXIS It determines for which axis will be generated the speed and or position reference It offers following options Real axis controlled by the drive Virtual axis used by the CAM block as master NOTE The CAM block and the virtual axis will be only available for the POS2 card with firmware version gt 1 50 Weg Language
194. k is ended 5 EXAMPLE OE 1 WANES ROTATION SPEED ACCELERATION AsIS wS PROFILE The digital input IX1 enables the drive The digital input IX2 enables the JOG block which has been programmed for generating a speed 170 WLP V9 90 reference for the virtual axis defined by user parameter UW800 with acceleration defined by the user parameter WUW801 The digital input IX3 enables the CAM block that from this moment n follows the master according to the profile defined in the parameter PROFILE As soon as this profile is ended the digital output QX3 will be activated If the digital input IX3 is always active the CAM profile will be executed continuously The profile below was used in the example CAM Edit lt toy cpr gt e ee l gt ler mv d ee ee eee ee ee fr PE aje a P is Als ale a ae Through the online monitoring following data were acquired E speed tr WLP Variables rend Fle Graph Help m b m d m m m 22 i oe EEE EEE 5 i I i i i I I i i i a a I i i i I 13 03 26 000 130928 500 1303 31 000 13 09 33 500 14043 0001 Scan 02035 Color Symbal Type Address Min Max Cursor val Actual val WMF Float Marker S000 1500 000 300 0000 0 00000008 000
195. l SYMBOL Execute Pw gControl Command4borted Error ErrorlO Bufferklode Updatel lode DESCRIPTION It executes the control of Iq programmed When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments It order to finish the block it is necessary the execution of another block or the changing of the drive to the Disabled or Errorstop status ARGUMENTS It consists of I Execute input I InTorque output and 11 arguments which are Iq 119 Iq Ramp 119 Buffer Mode 119 Update Mode 126 Busy 128 Active 128 146 Ei WLP V9 90 7 5 1 5 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The InIg output informs the moment when the Iq programmed is reached OPERATION MODE In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Continuous Motion BLOCK ERRORS Error de La Description EJ Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Single when another block is active Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another block is waiting MC block not executed Internal fault Iq programmed above the maximum allowed IqRamp programmed below the minimum allowed p82 IqRamp programmed abo
196. lculates the diameter of a winding in mm according to the relation between the line speed in m min and the effective motor speed rpm DIAMLENG Diameter estimation It estimates the coil diameter in mm according to the wound material length and thickness DMux Conversion from word to binary It converts one word to its respective 16 bits DRAW It implements the draw function to a given speed reference Draw is a value that can be added or multiplied to the value of a given speed reference EP Electronic Potentiometer It implements the electronic potentiometer function to the speed reference FLOAT2PO Conversion of the floating point to position It converts the value rpm as floating point to position as revolution and fraction of revolution These values can be used directly at the inputs of the positioning blocks LRAMP Linear reference ramp It implements the linear reference ramp according to the programmed acceleration and deceleration time plus quick deceleration ramp with option for selecting slow or normal reference MFILTER First order lowpass filter It implements the first order lowpass filter with enabling and reset This filter block does not show the same dynamic as the block FILTER of WLP since its calculations depend on the nameplate scam cycle MMIN2RPM Speed conversion from m min to rpm It determines the motor RPM that the motor should have based don the line speed m min and the roll diameter of the drive
197. lia A 5 d LAS nS 5 bold el T The previous figure presents the graphic representation of the logic status of the 4 digital inputs when they are deactivated 1 e when there is no signal at their terminals Those DI s associated to NO contacts show no conduction and those associated to NC contacts indicate conduction The normal coils will be energized if the contact connected to them allows conduction 1 e the coil input is equal to I The negated coils appear as energized only when the contact connected to them is not conducting i e the coil input is equal to 0 In next figure the digital inputs are active with 24Vdc applied to their terminals According to the indication the contact logic status is the opposite of what was presented in the figure 5 4 NO conducting and NC not conducting T l 2 3 4 5 6 a 9 T IE DET ole WEA 3 LEA ES 5 old od T Now the logic status of the contacts and coils are exactly contrary the previous ones m Eq Monitoring 81 5 4 Monitoring Numerics Values in the Ladder Some ladder function blocks as for instance the SCURVE and TCURVE use numeric variables with word markers floating markers and board or drive parameters The monitoring of those functions is done with the mouse click at the connector related to the numeric variable For example for monitoring the actual time of a timer that is in the Word marker MW6000 according to the next
198. lls 1 Select 75 the desired cells 2 Click with the left mouse button on a cell and drag it to the desired cell CLICKING ON THE FIRST CELL AMVWSOL MWS02 a ON 36000 0 12000 00 3000 00 1500 00 Relative DRAGGING TO THE LAST CELL OM WSDL AM WSD nn Nea FE cto et vedere A Oo a 36000 0 Pene 12000 00 Bigask 3000 00 S Bote ss eee 1500 00 L Blea Relative g ible k RELEASING THE LEFT MOUSE BUTTON Ei Edit Operations 77 4 3 ee WSO AM V SO Relative Pasting Cells 1 Select 75 the desired cells 2 Copy 36 or cut 36 the cells to the transfer areas 3 Activate command Paste 36 Lo bl TI ay Ja 4 Click with the left mouse button on the desired position 5 Click with the right mouse button to end the operation Monitoring Introduction The online monitoring is executed through the interface of the board and in the same manner as the Ladder program is loaded to the board 1 e after the compiled Ladder program has been loaded you can use the WLP program through the interface to display charts and to show through the logic status of the ladder program By means of the online monitoring you can display the logic status of contacts and coil of the ladder program as well as display the current values of the word and float markers and the parameter of the drive and board 78 WLP V9 90 Weg 5 2 Toolbar F
199. locity signals of the MC MoveVelocity block bit markers 6501 Weg Language 145 7 5 1 4 6502 and 6505 are reset and the CommandAborted signal bit marker 6503 is set for 1 scan The shaft status SW3406 changes from 5 Continuous Motion to 3 Stopping When the stop is finished the Done output of the MC_Stop block bit marker 6509 is set and remains until the Execute input bit marker 6506 is set The shaft status SW3406 remains equal to 3 Stopping and no other MC block will be executed With the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 the MC_MoveVelovity block is started but since the MC_Stop block is active an error and the Error signal will occur bit marker 6504 will be set and the word marker 8400 will contain the error value 69 When the Execute input of the MC_Stop block is reset the Busy Active and Done signals bit markers 6507 6508 and 6509 are reset The shaft status SW 3406 changes from 3 Stopping to 2 Standstill and other MCs blocks can be executed In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6500 the MC_MoveVelocity block is executed and thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the movement to reach the speed of 200 RPM starts The shaft status SW3406 changes from 2 Standstill to 5 Continuous Motion At the moment that the speed reaches 200 RPM the InVelocity output bit marker 6505 is set MW IqContro
200. lock at a time 208 1 l 3 5 T 2 aM SB000 oh 8001 4 g WEDO MINT FLOAT Perf S000 4UWEDI TMD12001 oral Ts mi li CFA T mi 11 I aM SB000 MSS001 WLP V9 90 Weg J 50000000 SCT WROD MINT FLOAT a Diol 6UWS03 un D18011 aM AS000 Soh S001 al 2005 EN TRANSFER ENO EN TRANSFER ENO SRC DST Magii oll 800 1 al 3100 al W1S101 Execute hw CamCale Done FastInput FastInput Real eh Wi I SOUT MumberOfPoints VohID1 S000 H MasterPoints oli D1 S010 W SlavePoints hla 1 kaw 3100 Curve Type CamTablelD alv 135002 parodie MFeriodic ol iL SOU Table aM XBO02 MSS001 al SX BO05 10 Execute FastInput ll We Feal ol W 1 300 CamTablelD Disable Disable l2 Command4borted Disable Error We Disable ErrorlD He Disable 13 Buffered MButferMode EndO Frofile Disable In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 8000 the MW CamCalc block is executed and the point table 11 word marker 13001 will be calculated according to the block arguments In this example the number of points of the curve will be the content of the word marker 13000 2 points the position of the master shaft will be according to the contents of the double markers 18000 and 18001 3 and 7 revolutions the position of the slave shaft will be according to the contents of the double markers 18010 and 18011 10 and 5 revol
201. locks Movement Control Word marker that configures the type of the curve of the first point of this CAM curve The type of curve of the other points will be according to the content of the word markers following the selected one for example if the configured word marker is the word marker 12000 the type of the curve will be according to the content of word marker 12000 the type of the curve of the second point will be according to the content of the word marker 12001 and so on The value of the content of the word marker must be 0 linear or I cubic spline PERIODIC Used in the MC blocks Movement Control This argument determines whether the execution of the cam table of the CAM curve will be continuous periodic or not The Periodic argument is always constant and can be e Non Periodic e Periodic When the cam table of the CAM curve is Non Periodic the CAM curve will be executed only once otherwise it will be executed continuously END OF PROFILE Used in the MC blocks Moment Control The End Of Profile signal is pulsed every time the execution of the CAM curve is finished 128 Ei WLP V9 90 The data type of the End Of Profile can be e disabled bit marker e digital output BUSY Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Busy signal informs if the block was not finished The data type of the Busy can be e disabled bit marker e digital output When the block starts the Busy si
202. lter OPERATION The EN input transfers always its value to the ENO output The block is executed while the EN input is 1 Otherwise the arguments are reset The filter transfer function is given by low pass output input time constant s 1 high pass output finput time constant s time constant s 1 NOTE The time constant is given in seconds If you want a constant lower than Is you must use the math block to divide the values or use constant values directly in the block in the user program IMPORTANT At maximum 2 filter blocks may be active each time When three of more filter blocks are enabled just two of them will be executed BLOCK DIAGRAM Low Pass 1st Order Filter EXAMPLE LX TNLT2000 NLT2000 NL 001 EN IMT2FL ENO IHT FLOAT FRAC SL WwW S00 sUWSsOl1 ch MEW DALE SU Pol O00 PoE O0 EN FUNC ENO H OUT I FUMC TION PoE O00 VN 2001 EN FL2InNT ENO FLOAT INT FRAC MF9000 DL ra VEE UW s02 UW S03 m gt g Language 255 7 5 6 6 The value contained in the analog input 1 of the drive is transferred to the word marker 6000 which is then converted to float and put into float marker 9000 The float marker 9000 is the filter input the time constant is 0 1s the filtered signal is put into the float marker 9001 CTENC SYMBOL EN CTENC Description This block is composed by 1 input EN
203. lways Ci O SW3404 ScanCyclesElapsed 2 C Csi CSCsCSCOY SX3406 Axis Status Real TSW 3408 Axis Status Virtual MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SX3000 SX3001 General Enabling SX3002 Motor Running SX3003 Start Stop SX3004 Speed Direction SX3005 Speed Direction SX3006 JOG SX3007 JOG SX3008 Local Remoto SX3009 Local Remote SX3010 In Fault SX3011 Fault Reset SX3012 In Subvoltage SX3014 PID Operation Mode SX3016 In Alarm SX3018 In Config Mode SX3020 Active Ramp SX3021 2 O 2nd Rampa SX3022 State of Command Run Only for CFW700 2 SX3023 2 YT ForceRunSofiPle SX3024 MmQuickSop o 2 SX3026 In Bypass Only for CFW70D 2 SX3028 In Fire Mode Only for CFW70 2 SX3032 Start 1 Keyborad SX3033 SX3034 Stop 0 Keyboard SX3036 Speed Direction Keyboard SX3038 Local Remote Keyboard SX3040 JOG Keyboard SW 3300 Motor Speed 13 bits SW 3302 Synchronous Motor Speed rpm Ei Language 109 MARKER SW 3304 SW 3306 7 SW 3308 SW3310 SW3312 SW3314 SW3316 SW3318 SW3320 SW3322 SW3324 CTW900 MARKER SX3000 SX3001 SX3002 SX3003 SX3004 SX3005 SX3006 SX3007 SX3008 SX3009 SX3010 SX3011 SX3012 SX3013 SX3014 SX3016 SX3018 SX3020 SX3021 SX3022 SX3024 SX3026 SX3028 SX3032 SX3033 SX3034 SX3036 SX3038 SX3040 SW3300 SW3302 SW3304
204. m pimi oel yrn ae f a l pm pimi 2 tym l 3 je 6 a ve Were pe slave position ve slave speed ae Slave acceleration je Slave jerk pm master position vm master speed pim initial master position pfm final master position pie initial slave position pfe final slave position a coefficient calculated bit the CAM editor b coefficient calculated bit the CAM editor c coefficient calculated bit the CAM editor Changing one point in the cam profile One point in the cam profile can be changed through the point table by the direct editing or by moving the point in the chart To move the point in the chart place the cursor on the point which will be marked by a red square Click on this red square and maintain the mouse activated and draw it to the new position Clicking on the point the point table will be displaced to the desired point selecting the related cell The moving operation of the chart point is interactive The whole profile is calculated at every change of the point The new point can be viewed in the point table Removing a point in the cam profile The point is remover directly on the point table Select one of the cells relating to the point and click on the button Remove Point Zoom of a determined chart area Click with the cursor on one of the edges of the region that should be zoomed and maintain the mouse button activated Move the mouse to mark the region At this moment a r
205. mber last files save as file and pause trend WLP V4 20 Launching of the new board PLC2 used by the drive CFW 09 The user must select the equipment and the respective firmware version that will be used for this project via Menu Project Proprieties 34 This board included in hardware all features of the PLC1 board and add 1 encorder input 1 analog input with 14 bits of 24 Ei WLP V9 90 resolution I PTC input and 2 analog outputs NOTE The V1 10 version of the POS2 board is only compatible with the WLP V4 20 WLP V4 10 Launching of the new board POS2 used by the servodrive SCA 05 The user must select the equipment and the respective firmware version that will be used for his project via Menu Project Proprieties 34 Blocks implemented for the board POS2 TRANSFER 273 it compares the current position with the programmed one SAT 269 2 new programming modes have been created It follows the master in position but it can also follow it speed In addition the synchronization source may be via CAN network or via Encoder INT2FL 2741 it executes the position increment of the motor shaft COMP 260 it executes positioning correction at each received signal PID 250 it allows speed and position read received via CAN network Variable write functions have been implemented for the following online monitoring items WLP V4 01 The online monitoring on WLP V4 00 does not work in
206. meters PM31 Read Words 2 103 ma PMO PM31 PMO PM31 Write Words 103 Read Bytes 2 103 Write Bytes 2 103 CANOpen Status 2 103 CANOpen Contol 2 103 1 Verify system marker function 1041 2 Refer to the WSCAN manual WEG Software CANOpen Config for further information 104 WLP V9 90 Weg 3 With expansion modules 4 The amount of markers is dynamic according of user need but included a total of 2000 bytes of retentive memory and 7344 bytes of volatile memory which will also be used for the internal variables of the blocks Functions of the system markers Functions of the system markers CFW 11 106 CFW700 108 CFW701 108 PLC11 01 e PLC11 02 107 POS2 105 SRWO1 PTC 107 SRW01 RCD 108 SCA06 108 SSW06 106 PLCI MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SXO Drive Enabling Return Drive Enable SX2 Fatal Error Reset SX3 Analog Input Alarm SWO Drive Speed Return rpm SW1 Drive Speed Return 13 bits KSW2 Generate User Error SW3 Board Error Return SWA 104 Drive Logic Command SW5 105 Drive Logic State Return SWT Reference Speed Return rpm PLC2 MARKER READING FUNCTION WRITING FUNCTION SXO Drive Enabling Return Drive Enable SX1 Motor PTC Sensor Input SX2 Fatal Error Re
207. monitoring of the user s program in question is represented I WEG Ladder Programmer Tutor1e ldd El Project Edit View Page Insert Tools Build Communicate Macro Window Help Deala SHB DE ee e ftp dd SE e Me l T l 2 3 4 z z 4 _Santch_1 OG El 0 _ w To help press F PLC1 01 1 80 Ln6 Col4 Page 1 of 1 pr Figure Active on line monitoring If digital input I of the board is active on line monitoring should appear as in figure 60 Thefigure indicates that digital input 1 is active and that when executing the user s program the digital output 1 is also activated j l 3 4 5 F 2 F X viteh 1 t FE T _ __ _ _ Ei 334 WLP V9 90 Figure Digital input 1 activated The digital input output monitoring box can also be used through the button p according to next figure It indicates the same thing as ladder monitoring that is when activating digital input 1 digital output 1 will also be activated 0 l 3 4 5 T B a santch_1 Ko il qq q i qx I z WLP 1 0 Monitoring 5 m FLL Inputs DI Dl2 Di3 Dl4 DIE DIE Dl DIS 7 o 9 9 9 Drive Inputs 2 1101 DOZ DINOS DI104 01105 i w sd sd PLC Outputs 7 DO DO DOF D04 DOs oe ws d amp bad 5 r Drive Outputs G D0101 D0102 DOs ad vad sad 10 Figure Input output monitoring box 10 7 Examples of User s Programs 10 7 1 On Off via buttons Tut
208. n acceleration deceleration configured in the Standard Profile With the execution of the MC StepAbsSwitch block the user s reference position P0052 and P0053 is not changed Weg Language 195 When the search finishes the Done output goes to 1 during a scan cycle or while the Execute input is in 1 ARGUMENTS It is composed of 1 Execute input 1 Done output and 10 arguments which are Switch Mode 1197 Velocity 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished OPERATING MODE When the MC_StepAbsSwitch block is executed the drive will start operating in position grid and remain this way even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the block the Shaft Status will change to Homing and will remain this way until the execution of the MC_StepRefPulse MC_StepDirect or MC_FinishHoming blocks BLOCK ERRORS Error pi Speed programmed below the minimum allowed Speed programmed above the maximum allowed Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status P202 different from 4 PLC State of the Drive different from Standstill or Homing KM 6 Drive in the Stopping status Digital inputs 1
209. n A N E E 52 TEN ee ener ee ee eee eee ee 52 o 10 EE ran en ee EE EN EN eee ee 52 SG ag EE EE E solace ef eeaee nessa 52 EEE ENE 53 FONG a EEE ee oceee eee 53 SEE EEE eee eee ease ene E NES 2 ENE 53 0 EEE ES EE ee ee ere eee ENE ee 54 IE EEE EEE 54 Lea EEE NE EE dee sannen sconeeseoe 54 TRAN FER hht 54 FT 54 NRL r r E demoscene eds cee feesyeseeunecosaaueoouneeaes A E sessee sete ascerse 55 VATN a E E 55 PS ea 4 55 ENN 55 VS EEE ENE 55 PE 56 DN 56 VERE ph 56 MM R a E opecqescsedanucsiseseecesesecascosesee E E neces 57 6 TOOS a E E E A E E 57 Parameter VANGS Lee 57 ODS Sian A E E a 57 CANNA 57 Cam POL sssini anaia aE AEREA A EA ERAR ARER 58 APP cais R ene nesusuestinwinttenaanieehieavaneatak 68 OE EEE EN EEE EE SE 68 EN 68 7 Bola aatereeccee ces eee cases cae sence cutee aces ceseectecsencccueeecnecsen secteanneussaeuceeueeectuneuvnesuereeeaceicennen 68 CompS EE ME 68 Compile Subroullne USERPB Lu cm assssennmdeteneu vti ddedsddsunddne 69 DD a E AE su EAEE E EEE EE 69 COMTI RS in aE EEE a EE age se EAE E E 69 BPO OA EN NR EN 69 UPON Fe 69 Online Monholng sssrinin sso aaa enke 70 Contig Online MOMNGHIAG vuaurmesoamsenmm gs 70 EL Nr 70 NL 70 OG 1 515 EE EE ME 70 Copyright O 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved 6 WLP V9 90 Weg 5 PS A eag ei AA EN EE 70 DY aE E E S E N 71 Monitoring Varables sisccocccccvaciesecnvececeencccsenwcdvenccnecacSchdenvetustesveenduxedicseevaseasceceaseudeesecwsccesesensdic
210. n SlaveAddress is free to send data Busy variable at FALSE level If so it sends the reading request of a number of bits indicated by NumberOfData in InitialDataAddress address using chosen function in Function and sets the Active output resetting it when receiving the response from the slave The received data is stored in the Value variable If the slave is not weg Language 283 free the block waits Busy go to FALSE level to resubmit the request NOTE If Execute goes to FALSE level and Busy is still at TRUE level the request is canceled NOTE Value is an array of size equal to NumberOfData It is important to check this compatibility not to generate errors in the block When Execute has FALSE value Done remains FALSE The Done output is only activated when the block finishes executing successfully remaining at TRUE level until Execute receives FALSE If there is any error in the execution the Error output is enabled and ErrorlD displays an error code according to the table below Executed successfully Invalid input data Timeout in slave response Slave returned error Block Flowchart Master not enabled 284 WLP V9 90 Send read request according to Function Active TRUE Slave has answered or Timeout _ j Rising edge in Execute Done FALSE Execute TRUET Active FALSE Error FALSE Error TRUE ErrorlD 0 Update Erro
211. n shaft Mux Binary to word conversion It converts 16 bits into a respective word PO2FLOAT Position to floating point conversion It converts the position of the actual or virtual axis only POS2 from the format signal turns and turn fraction to a floating point number The data acquisition is performed directly from the board parameters being then converted to a floating point number RPM2MMIN Conversion of a rpm speed to a linear speed m min It determines the line speed in m min based on the motor speed rpm and on the roll diameter of the driven shaft m P g Language 309 8 2 RPMCFW09 Conversion of the effective speed in 13 15 bits format to rpm The Word marker of the system SW I effective speed 13 15bits and the parameter of the system P767 synchronous motor rpm will give you the effective motor speed rpm as well as the motor direction of rotation This is only available with the CFWO9 TAPER Calculation of the taper hardness function Through an initial and a final diameter definition you define will set the taper hardness function for winding according to predefined force set point and a percentual decreasing of this set point Compiler General Review Commands Compile 63 Debug 69 Messages Fatal Errors 309 Errors 310 Warnings 312 Informations 313 Fatal Errors See below the description of the Fatal Compiler Errors Fatal Error C1 Compile
212. n the USERFB library and a password When you choose the Folder Project the USERFB is stored in Directory where WLP is installed PROJECTS Project Name MACROS When you choose the Folder Library the USERFB is stored in Directory where WLP is installed MACROS On a standard WLP installation Directory where WLP is installed C WEG WLP VX YZ where X YZ is Weg Language 297 the WLP version Note USERFBs that are stored in the USERFB library can be used by any project If you activated the password option and want to use thisoption please create a password that you will remember The password will be required for future USERFB edition Click on the Next button Wizard New Macro Step 2 of 4 Properties of Input Parameters Voltar Cancelar Ajuda The second step of the USERFB creation assistant is to define the input parameters properties The type of parameter can be one of the following options PO F1 Type BOOLEAN Mame WORD FLOAT In this example the input parameters will be defined as follows Po jm Type BOOLEAN Name jON PD Pr Type BOOLEAN Hame OFF Click on the Next button Ei 298 WLP V9 90 Wizard New Macro Step 3 of 4 Properties of Output Parameter P16 Type BOOLEAN v Mame DUT The third step of the USERFB creation assistant is to define the properties of the output p
213. nalog input I of the converter IW 101 is transferred toMW 7000 word marker In line 3 the MW7000 marker is converted into floating point and stored in the MF9000 float marker In line 6 theMF9000 float marker which has the content of the analog input AI 1 0 to 10Vec 0 to 32767 is multiplied by the engineering unit maximum value In this example 3000 was used and the result is stored in theMF9002 float marker In line 9 theMF9002 float marker is divided by the range of the analog input 0 to 32767 and the result is stored in theMF9003 float marker which is already the analog input converted into engineering unit 0 to 3000 In line 13 the MF9003 float marker is converted into integer and stored in the MW7001 word marker Basically the analog input of 0 to 10Vdc that has its content represented as 0 to 32767 is converted to an engineering unit with 0 to 3000 scale and stored in the MF9003 and MW7001 markers z 348 WLP V9 90 10 7 7 Analog Input Reading 4 20mA Tutor10 0 l 3 4 5 T 8 a READ ANALOGINPUT AND CONVERT TO FLOAT POINT NUMBER t 4 20m 2 10 Vee 6555 527679 vMX3407 TWLIOL HSRC DET br 4 W77000 3 vMX3407 SMF FOO0 HINT FLOAT b PM FSO00 5 SUBTRACT OFFSET 4ma 6553 ME 3407 seMFoooo MDATA 1 RES Ib bxMFSOO1 nm z OPERATOR amp 55e 003 H DATA 2 9 p LIMIT VALUE WITHOUT OFFSET 4mA 4 20mA 0 26214 sMX3407 l1 EN SAT ENO aMFoOO1 MIN OUT b esMrs
214. necessary either to copy the project to another computer or to save a safety copy one should copy this folder to a new target Editing a Ladder Programm Tutor1 With a new blank project created and all the environment functionalities known one can create the program in ladder The example displayed is very simple however it will help to illustrate some aspects of the edition and programming environment To create the program follow the steps below 1 step Select function insert contact usually opened HER E LU fa ole FME iy Figure Select NO Contact 2 step Take the cursor up to the cell of line 0 and column 0 Figure Position in lin 0 col 0 3 step Click this cell with the mouse Tutorial 323 Ei ddmd 1 l Figure Insert NO contact 4 step Press the ESC key or select the pointer function ai lel amp FAE f BE HE Figure Select pointer function 5 step Take the mouse up to the inserted contact EE 1 277 t Figure Position inserted contact 6 step Double click the contact The following box will be displayed Propeties 4H Type Address Range Mix Retentrve 1000 1671 hd Volatile 2000 3407 Cancel Help Figure Contact property box This is the contact property box one can redefine the type of contact in it according to next figure Normally Oper Contact z
215. nection DESCRIPTION The cursor becomes similar to the toolbar button shown above You can insert a vertical connection by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the vertical line cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar IT Eq Menus 43 3 9 9 3 5 5 1 3 5 5 2 3 9 6 3 5 6 1 3 5 6 2 Contacts NO CONTACT ACCESS Menu Insert Contact NO CONTACT Edit Toolbar AH FUNCTION It inserts a NO Contact 131 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a contact by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the contact cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar NC CONTACT ACCESS Menu Insert Contact NC CONTACT Edit Toolbar an FUNCTION It inserts a NC Contact 191 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a contact by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the contact cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar Coils COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils COIL Edit Toolbar au FUNCTION Inserts a coil 132 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on
216. ng files will exist INITIALIZE sld it is the ladder program executed only during the board initialization INT_DI108 sld it is the ladder program executed by the DI108 interruption digital input signal INT DI109 sld it is the ladder program executed by the DI109 interruption digital input signal INT_TIMER sld it is the ladder program executed by means of a programmable time interruption Configuration Wizards It lists all the project configuration wizards In order to execute the configuration wizard double click the wizard name When selecting the configuration wizard at the project configuration tree the following items of the icon bar will be activated A 4 Download of the configuration wizard settings to the equipment El SH Upload of the equipment configuration wizard settings Note The configuration wizard download will only become active after executing the configuration wizard and thus generating a valid configuration 1 e after finishing the configuration wizard Monitoring Dialog It lists all the monitoring dialog 31 boxes of the project In order to open the dialog box double click the dialog box name Weg Overview 31 2 2 8 Trend Variable Dialog It lists all the trend variable 84 files of the project In order to open the trend variable dialog box double click the text Trend Variable Dialog or the file name Monitoring Variables It lists
217. nication Config Online Monitoring Hexadecimal FUNCTION During online monitoring it changes all the monitoring boxes to an hexadecimal format Weg Menus 3 8 4 5 3 8 5 3 8 6 3 8 7 71 Binary ACCESS Menu Communication Config Online Monitoring Binary FUNCTION During online monitoring it changes all the monitoring boxes to a binary format Monitoring Variables ACCESS Menu Communication Variables Monitoring Hot Key Shift F9 Communication Toolbar Al FUNCTION Activate or deactivate the variables monitoring 82 IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Trend Variables ACCESS Menu Communication Trend of Variables Hot Key Ctrl F9 Communication Toolbar El FUNCTION Open a dialog showing a trend graphic 84 with the chosen variables IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Monitoring Input Outputs ACCESS Menu Communication I O Monitoring Hot Key Alt F9 Communication Toolbar FUNCTION Open a dialog that shows the current state of the digital inputs and outputs 881 from the PLC and drive IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 1 72 Ei WLP V9 90 3 8 8 3 8 9 3 8 10 3 8 11 Monitoring by HMI ACCESS Menu Communication Monitoring by HMI Hot Key Ctrl Alt F9 Communication Toolbar Ea FUNCTION Open a dialog that shows the Monitoring by HMI Dialo
218. nnnnnnennner 82 6 Variables Monitoring L asmavsaesmsassesmsmrsmnt muttkekenednvdibtkndekdae 82 7 Trend ovale nnnm nnna 84 8 Inputs Outputs Monitoring saaaxxxernnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 88 9 MOON Via the Ten 90 10 Force NS NS a cartes susana aa a E EEEE 91 11 General Information Online rannnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnennnnnennnnn 93 12 Parameters Value Table ieciiscscieciaccacnctaieasscdenawasccticeincecdedeneustveceiwentccenswentmueauecevsessweceswereweceevend 93 Parte VI Communications 94 1 General NNN 94 2 NVE 94 3 Installing Uninstalling USB Driver nnunernnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnevnnnnnnnevnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnr 95 Parte VII Language 96 Copyright 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved Ei Content 7 LNR 96 Element STIGE Vava 96 DAT NS sacs orca anteaters E tr aeons ots ate ob scien cd meatte acs cusy cb ee eae ne ea nia act an eae REnmeateaneineRaaaG 97 FUNCTIONS of th system MAKES sesinic cspecs ce ntetwasccindicccsnscactnausnnaanstncearnessansnenanneanaascanaubaentsaseantdimbencansadaatennns 104 COI RU aa 4v544v4v4v4dr47244drvrrv4ve EEA A Ei 110 Types OF UM EN eee eden 114 Quick re Trene EE ER NR ER M ch eanal 129 2 TRO 130 Comnena GNR 130 EE oa EEE DENE EE ENE 131 NONA ee 131 NEMNE 131 GRE NN 132 COL sence a sa raat he cae ated nc evan sonn scam eanene dan euat
219. nput So SRC will have a digital input as value and DST a SXO system marker Please consider that the motor is enabled only if it has been already enabled in the CFW 09 inverter This may be programmed for instance at the digital input 1 of the drive 7 5 8 2 INT2FL SYMBOL EN INTZFL ENO IHT FLOAT eg Language 275 7 5 8 3 DESCRIPTION This block is formed by 1 EN input ENO output and 3 arguments as follows integer 117 word float 117 result The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output is a copy of the EN input value OPERATION The EN input transfers always its content to the ENO output While the EN input is 1 the values contained in the integer are transferred to the float marker EXAMPLE alt voli Oh EN INT2ZFL ENO FLOAT Converts the value of the user parameter 800to a float and stores it in the float marker 9000 FL2INT SYMBOL EN FL2INT ERO FLOAT INT DESCRIPTION This block is formed by 1 EN input 1 ENO output and 3 arguments being float 117 32 bits integer 17 word The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output is a copy of the EN input value OPERATION The EN input transfers always its contet to the ENO output While the EN input is 1 the value contained in the float is transferred to the integer word If the float value is higher than 32767 its value is saturated in the conversion resulting in an
220. nput I is captured then a positioning will be triggered with the signal from the user parameter P800 the number of turns from the user parameter P801 the turn fraction from the user parameter P802 the speed in rpm from the user parameter P803 and the acceleration in rpm s based on the user parameter P804 When finished it writes I during 1 scan cycle at the digital output I 7 5 2 5 CAM SYMBOL PROFILE DESCRIPTION This block comprises 1 EN input I ENO output and 2 argument being PROFILE CAM positioning profile Cam Profile Type Fixed the positioning profile is transferred together with the user program and it will not be able to suffer modifications Calculable the positioning profile is transferred together with the user program and it will be able to suffer modifications through the execution of the CALCCAM block For calculable positioning profiles the following parameters are necessary e Maximum Number of Points It is a constant value that configures the maximum number of points that this CAM will be able to have e First Master Point It is a float marker that configures the position of the master of the first point of this CAM profile the position of the master of the other points will be according to the contents of the float markers subsequent to the selected one The contents of the used float markers must have the format of turns for instance 1 5 turns 0 25 turn Important If the mast
221. nt Control The jerk can be programmed with a constant value or by means of a float marker The value must be programmed in RPM s2 revolutions per minute per second squared The maximum allowed value is 300 000 RPM s2 Only positive values will be accepted IQ Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The Ig can be programmed with a constant value or by means of a float marker The value must be programmed in Arms Amps rms IQ RAMP Used in the MC blocks Movement Control The IQ ramp can be programmed with a constant value or by means of a float marker The value must be programmed in Arms s Amps rms per second DIRECTION Used in the MC blocks Movement Control This argument determines the movement direction The direction is always constant and can be e MC Positive positive direction e MC Negative negative direction e MC SwitchPositive only in the MC StepAbsSwitch block positive direction if AbsSwitch not activated and negative direction if activated e MC SwitchNegative only in the MC StepAbsSwitch block negative direction if AbsSwitch not activated and positive direction if activated SWITCH MODE LIMIT SWITCH MODE Used in the MC blocks Movement Control This argument determines the reading mode of the digital input used as AbsSwitch or LimitSwitch The Switch Mode Limit Switch Mode is always constant and can be e MC EdgeOn leading edge e MC EdgeOff falling edge BUFFER MODE Used in th
222. o D l S A 294 MX6502 i FE TH MX65023 i MSW3406 6 2 0 Velocidade 200 When changing the value of the bit marker 6500 from 0 to 1 Enable input of the MC_Power block the real shaft is enabled and its status word marker of system 3406 changes to Standstill SW3406 2 The Status output bit marker 6501 is set After the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6502 the MC_MoveAbsolut block is executed and the positioning for the position 10 revolutions starts The shaft status is changed to Discrete Motion SW 3406 6 While the positioning is executed the bit marker 6500 Enable input of the MC_Power block is reset but since the BufferMode of the MC_Power is configured as Buffered the shaft will only be disabled at the conclusion of the positioning When the positioning is finished the bit marker 6503 Done output of the MC MoveAbsolut block is set for 1 scan cycle and the shaft is disabled MC_Power Enable 0 The shaft status changes to Disable MC_Power Enable 0 7 5 1 2 MC Reset SYMBOL Execute ML Feset DESCRIPTION Clears Drive Fault Weg Language 141 When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be executed If the configured shaft is in Fault the shaft status will be in Errorstop when the block is executed the shaft status will change to Disabled ARGUMENTS It is composed of 1 Execute input 1 Done output and 4 arguments
223. o error is detected excepting the negative errors that are not fatal errors PUL is the number of pulses received after the last INDEX This value is updated during the scan cycle OTHER INFORMATION EN block enable 0 inactive 1 active AUTO 0 the block is in Manual mode i e no correction SHIFT is executed even when a difference between PF and REG is detected 230 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 5 4 3 1 block in automatic mode 1 e any difference detected between PF and REG activates the SHIFT block if it is not active yet and forces a correction of this error Q 0 indicates that the block is not enabled or it has not concluded the initialization process yet it did not receive the 2 INDEX or there is any error 1 indicates that the block is operating normally 1 e all parameters can be used already with safety PF is the PRINT FORMAT i e it is the distance in number of pulses between 2 INDEX s If any INDEX is received before the PF WIN or after the PF WIN the read is ignored If it value is zero 0 the INDEX will be read always WIN window for INDEX actuation See PF SHIFT values of the maximum correction during the scan cycle when there is an error between PF and REG and the block is in automatic mode SRC 0 resolver 1 encoder ERR block error code 2 I INDEX was not received or it was received after PF WIN this error is not fatal 1 PF has a value diff
224. oad values of a wizard which had a page that does not exist Fatal error when device connected to USB port incorrectly answered with a 512 bytes response Including system markers SW3322 and SW3324 on TRANSFER block for CFW700 and CFW701 System marker SX3121 was wrong address in PLC11 Fixed the issue of the user parameters dialog for CFW100 which had problems when the decimal digits were different from 0 Weg Overview 13 WLP V9 40 New features for CFW700 and CFW701 V2 00 In the project properties it was included options to copy of the SoftPLC software from the memory card to the drive 0 copy is always allowed 1 does not allow copying from a memory card that already has a copy of the SoftPLC software or 2 never allows copying Delivered the digital input frequency called IW4 New block POSITIONO 151 for CFW700 which allows the engine to allocate a certain position WLP V9 20 Included new equipments CFW 100 CFW501 MW500 New functions CFW500 V1 50 included setting the table of default values of user parameters CFW500 V1 50 Included engineering units referenced CFW500 V1 50 included configuration table of standardts values of user parameters CFW500 V1 50 included the referenced engineering units Improvements SSW700 TRANSFER included options IW and QW CFW500 V1 50 Included markers SX3022 and SX3023 CFW701 V1 23 included marker SX3022
225. ock is activated However other blocks Set Speed may be enabled online thus changing the programming of its arguments To finish this movement you must use the stop block The ENO output changes to 1 onl during one scan cycle as the block reaches the programmed speed Otherwise it is always 0 Important This block works in speed loop and remains in this status even arter it has been concluded FLOWCHART 214 WLP V9 90 Ei SE TSPEED Is this block active continue run Did reach the programmed _ speed EN 0 Previous EM 07 Is there one positioning active N Is a setspeed Initialize the block ENO 1 CHART Weg Language 215 E EN SETSPEED SPEED MINIMUM 4 SCAN CYCLE a lO oe Horano MW ROTATION 500 0 SPEED 10000 0 4 ACCELERATION Feal HASIS LA 102 FEI ol 102 ELD EN SETSPEED ENO Anti hori rno HROTATION 1000 0 H SPEED 10000 0 4 ACCELERATION Feal HASIS ol oe oll We DECELERAT ION re Cancela M MODE R Automatica H CONTROL Real WASIS During the transition from 0 to I of the digital input I of the drive the block with speed of 500 rpm in clockwise direction of rotation is triggered As soon as this speed is reached the digital output I is set During the transition from 0 to I of the digital input 2 of the drive the block with speed of 1000 rpm in couter clockwi
226. of points the point values and the interpolation types for the arguments programmed in the calculable CAM blocks The EN input is responsible for the block enabling The ENO output informs the moment the block is started The block CAM is responsible for the positioning defined in its profile Fundamentally the CAM device has the function to convert a rotary motion into a forward and backward motion defines by a cam profile Figure below shows how this cam profile is defined mechanically Prere Figure Mechanical CAM OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block is not executed and the ENO output is 0 If the EN input is 1 the block executes the programmed CAM profile using the virtual axis as master All WLP positioning and speed blocks can be used for generating the reference for the virtual axis The CAM block is always relative i e the position of the virtual axis will be considered as master zero position at the start As soon as the CAM profile is ended the ENO output goes to 1 during one scan cycle after that is returns to 0 NOTE The virtual axis is the used axis as master for the CAM block From the firmware version 1 50 all Weg Language 169 positioning and motion blocks in POS 2 can generate a reference for the virtual axis CHART CAM Is there any positioning active Ts this the block 7 The positioning is started Is the positioning ended The bloc
227. of the dialog box you can save and open these trend configurations from the dialog box as well as print the respective trend Inputs Outputs Monitoring You can check the status of the digital inputs outputs of the board and drive through the input outputs monitoring dialog box Press button Input Output Monitoring for loading thisdialog box As during the online monitoring process the WLP tries to establish the communication with the board and it will test the communication and executes the same operations as described above The input output monitoring dialog box has following features PLC1 PLC2 e POS2 Monitoring WLP I O Monitoring Inputa 1 Dl2 DIS Dl4 DIB DIE DI DIS I I I I I I Drive Inputs 01101 D1102 D103 D1104 D1105 DI106 I GI DO4 DOS DOG I G DOI DOW BOWS I GI SOFTPLC CFW 11 WLP I O Monitoring Inputa 1 Dl2 oe V Expansion Inputs Dl DIS DIS Di4 2 v Expansion Outputs Do4 DOs DOW D011 o v SOFTPLC SSW 06 WLP Monitora o de E S Dle DIS DOS PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 89 Ei 90 WLP V9 90 WLP I O Monitoring Inputs 01101 D1102 D103 D1104 D1105 DITO6 D D1108 D1105 2 I I I I I I I Drive Inputs DI Die DIS D4 DIS DIE I I I I Outputs DO DO102 BOIS D0104 DOTS DO106 Drive Outputs DOT Doe DOS J I GI SRW01 PTC and SRW01 RCD WLP I O Monitoring Inputs DI w
228. ole 1014 aM O15 Ei 272 WLP V9 90 7 5 7 6 DMUX SIMBOLO DESCRIPTION It has 1 input EN 1 output ENO e 17 arguments sendo eles word bit 0 15 The EN input is responsable to enable the block The ENO output is enabled if the block was enabled too WORD The word argument has 1 data type and 1 address The data type can be user parameter word marker BIT 0a 15 Each bit has I data type and 1 address The data type can be disabled bit marker digital output user parameter FUNCTION The EN input always transfer its value to the ENO output The word value was shared and transfer to the 16 outputs bits EXAMPLE weg Language 7 9 8 7 5 8 1 MX 2000 Transference TRANSFER SYMBOL EN TRANSFER ENO DESCRIPTION This block is formed by I EN input I ENO output and 2 arguments being SRC source data ol Wed DST destination data EN DRUG The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output goes I when the transfer is done In most cases it is done immediately unless a driver parameter has been chosen as the source or destination SRC Source Data Depending on the selected data type the source data may be formed by a data type and an address or a constant value The source data type may be constant float constant bit marker word marker float marker system marker digital input digital
229. on 119 l 186 WLP V9 90 Buffer Mode n Update Mode 126 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished OPERATING MODE When the MC MoveAbsolute block is executed the drive will start operating in position grid and remain this way even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the positioning the shaft status will change to Discrete Motion When the positioning is concluded the shaft status will change to Standstill BLOCK ERRORS Deceleration programmed above the maximum allowed Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status block is waiting 7 Drive in the Homing status Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another weg Language 187 EXAMPLE 0 1 2 3 4 4 6 7 S 9 MNO5500 wA Execute PAC love Absolute 10 000000 H Position SNC6501 200 00 H Velocity Vi 6502 1000 00 Acceleration Command4borted GN05503 1000 00 Deceleration Error Desabilitado ErrorlD Desabilitade ABORTING MButferkode RIEING MA Updatelvlode VO6505 TVS 509 Execute PC love absolute 15 000000 H Position TVS 5
230. only to POS2 CAN network master must have the block MSCANWEG 278 enabled 228 WLP V9 90 Weg E CANopen network enabled via WSCAN 57 for PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 with firmware version gt 1 20 OPERATION If the master drive would be sending the data through CAN net and the input EN of FOLLOW block would be activated the slave motor follow the master motor with the values of the synchronism relation in speed loop Only when the slave motor achieves the specified relation of master motor the output ENO of the block will be set EXAMPLE OE NKI EN FOLLOW ENO SLAVE MASTER DIRECTION ACCELERATION MODE SOURCE AXIS If the master are sending the data through the CAN net the slave motor run the 1 2 times the speed of master motor 7 5 4 2 AUTOREG SYMBOL EN AUTOREG DESCRIPTION The block Autoreg consists of 2 inputs EN and AUTO 1 output ENO and 10 arguments as follow pf print format float that defines the pulse distance between 2 signals received at index input zero pulse win window float that defines the window that activate the reading of the signal in the index input shift float that defines the maximum pulse number that can be corrected by scan cycle src source constant word that defines if counting is executed by encoder or resolver sh bit marker that indicates that the shift block in clockwise direction should be activated Weg Language 229
231. ons in the Pump Genius Multiplex application version 2 00 It was corrected the logic that does not show on the HMI of CFW 11 the value selected in the configuration wizard for the parameter P0205 WLP V9 71 New functions New bit system markers for CFW 100 SX3032 HMI Keyboard 1 SX3034 HMI Keyboard 0 SX3046 HMI Keyboard Up SX3048 HMI Keyboard Down Corrections Failed to download software to PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 connected to CC11D card of the CFW11 WLP V9 70 New functions CFW11 Ve5 30 included system markers SX3022 e SX3023 90 user parameters included application Pump Genius Multiplex Control V2 00 SCA06 V1 40 include the analog outputs ZQW1 e QW2 Updated the versions of CFW11 CFW100 CFW500 CFW700 CFW701 CTW900 CVW300 SCA06 SSW06 SSW7000 Improvements FTDI driver updated Installer compatible with Windows 8 1 Included in help the error 97 for the blocks MC_StepAbsswitch MC_StepLimitSwitch e MC_StepRefPulse of SCA06 Corrections In user parameter configuration in decimal point set for engeener unit Monitoring fault in slow communications Decompiler for SCA06 error which changed block MW_CamCalc to MC Camln and CAM Profiles Fixed and Calculated Calculation of acceleration and jerk in CAM editor WLP V9 61 12 WLP V9 90 Weg Corrections Latching PLC11 01 e PLC11 02 after downloading Ladder Dialogs errors in configur
232. ooe 12 2 62e 004 HMA O 00e 000 H MIN 13 Figure Tutor10 Page I of 2 Weg Tutorial 349 l 2 3 4 5 T 3 a P CONVERT ANALOGINPUT 4 20m gt 0 26214 0 MAX MMS S407 EN MATH ENO oh FY002 HDATA 1 oh FY003 2 H OPERATOR 3 00e 003 HOATA 2 z oS S407 3 EN MATH ENO av FSO0S DATA 1 ne MI FOOD S I H OFERATOR 2 64e 004 HOATA 2 6 CONVERT FLOAT POINT NUMBER TO INTEGER vo ES407 EN FLZINT ENO KI F9004 H FLOAT INT r te 7001 a Figure Tutor10 Page 2 of 2 Functioning In line 2 of page 2 the analog input lof the converter IW 101 is transferred toMW7000 word marker In line 4 of page 1 the MW7000 marker is converted into floating point and stored in the MF9000 float marker In line 7 of page 1 the offset is subtracted from the 4mA of theMF9000 float marker and stored in theMF9001 float marker In line 11 of page 1 the MF9001 float marker is limited to 0 to 26214 where 32767 6553 26214 and stored in the MF9002 float marker In line 1 of page 2 theMF9002 float marker which stores the content of analog input AI 1 4 a 20mA 0 a 26214 is multiplied by the engineering unit maximum amount in this example 3000 was used and the result is stored in theMF9003 float marker In line 4 of page 2 theMF9003 is divided by the range of the analog input that is 26214 and the result is stored in the MF9004 float marker which already is the analog input con
233. opied to corresponding arguments ae ENO 0 Properties Box of the USERFB Block 296 l WLP V9 90 Call Macro Configuration Input Parameter Output Parameter Mame Information Open Create Remove Double clicking the USERFB block opens this properties box It is possible to perform the following operations by using the Properties Box Select the USERFB to be executed by using the Name select Obtain information about the selected USERFB by using the Information button Open the USERFB for edition by using the Open button Create a new USERFB by using the Create button Remove the selected USERFB by using the Remove button Define the arguments of the input parameters by using the tab Input Parameters e Define the arguments of the output parameters by using the tab Output Parameters Creating a new USERFB In order to create a new USERFB click on the Create button and a creation assistant will help you to define the necessary parameters for the USERFB as presented in the following example Wizard New Macro Step 1 of 4 m Macro Proprieties Password Mame FETE H Enable Folder Project C Library o Number of inputs 2 Humber of outputs 1 Cancelar Ajuda The first step of the USERFB creation assistant is to define the name the number of input and output parameters if the USERFB will be stored in the project or i
234. or are used maximum size 10m B X4 connector RJ 11 6x6 C female DB9 connector oignal PC DB9 Drive XC7 RXD 2 6 TXD 3 4 GND E 5 Installing Uninstalling USB Driver INSTALLING The procedure below explains the method of installing the USB driver onto the PC to establish communication between the PC and drives through the USB port Read it thoroughly before setting up the hardware software e Close all applications on your PC If you are using an anti virus or firewall software close them or disable their function e After connecting the drive to the USB port of PC Windows will find a new hardware The Found New Hardware Wizard will launch The operational system will ask you for necessary drivers Choose Install from a list or specific location Advanced and click Next e Ensure the Search for the best driver in these locations and Include this location in the search boxes are 96 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 1 7 1 1 both checked e Click Browse Now you need to enter the path to the driver Folder C Weg WLP VX YZ DRIVER_USB contains driver Choose it and click Next e If the location you specified is correct Windows will locate the drivers and proceed with the installation e After Windows has installed the necessary drivers you will be notified by a window indicating that the wizard has finished installing the software Click Finish to complete the installation process NOTE C Weg WLP VX YZ
235. or2 and Tutor3 1 l 3 4 5 T 5 a 0 IZ ON IX OFF Ox EI I Ox EI Figure Tutor2 representation with tags Ei Tutorial 335 g F 0 TX IED ara NEI a Figure Tutor2 representation with addresses Functioning When applying a pulse in digital input I IX1 digital output I QX1 is activated and it is mantained by its own contact in parallel to digital input responsible for its activation When pulsing digital input 2 IX2 the circuit is opened thus deactivating digital output 1 QX1 The same program could be redone in the following way by using set and reset coils Tutor3 0 l 2 3 4 5 T z J p IX ON ox KI 0 a m m T a E E E E Figure Tutor3 representation with tags Figure Tutor3 representation with addresses 10 7 2 On Off via user s parameters Tutor4 l a 3 4 5 T 2 J UW On Ox El Figure Tutor4 representation with tags 0 l 2 3 4 5 T i g ol Wedd os Figure Tutor4 representation with addresses Functioning With parameter P800 equal to zero digital output 1 will be off with parameter P800 in 1 the digital output 1 will be activated When we use parameters as contacts even values represent zero for contact and odd values represent one for the contact 336 WLP V9 90 Ei 10 7 3 Enable disable drive and control speed Tutor5 and Tutor6 10 ll 12 13 14 0 l 4 5 T i
236. orted Error ErrorlD MESS 4 WMA KASR ELI tehi6503 Desabilitado Desabilitado Thi 5 09 wO wM 507 wA Desabilitado Desabilitado Ei Language 123 THAK6500 tm gt THAKGS01 tg gt THAX6502 tg gt THA 6503 TT THA 6504 tp gt t pg L oo gt to ee oA 6s08 tri of SpA 6s09 _ oe 2HMX6505 2HMX 6506 2HMX6507 Velocidade 200 100 Posicao 15 10 In the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 the first MC MoveAbsolute block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the positioning for position 10 revolutions starts With the transition from 0 to 1 of bit marker 6505 the second MC MoveAbsolute block starts but it will wait for the conclusion of the block in execution thus the Busy signal of this block bit marker 6506 is set When the positioning of 10 revolutions is reached the first block is concluded thus the Busy and Active signals of this block are reset and the Done output bit marker 6504 is set to 1 scan At the same time the execution of the second block starts the Active signal bit marker 6507 is set and the search for the position 15 revolutions starts 124 WLP V9 90 WE When the position 15 revolutions is reached the Done output of the second block bit marker 6509 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 a
237. ounting of the pulses of the programmed encoder starts When the number of counted pulses reaches the counting reference REF CNT the Q output goes to 1 for 1 scan cycle returning to 0 later If a RESET occurs the current value argument CV is zeroed and the Reset Occurred argument goes to I for I scan cycle returning to 0 later Ifa SAVE occurs the current value argument CV is saved in SV and the Reset Occurred argument goes to I for I scan cycle returning to 0 later If the PRESET input is 1 the current value argument CV will have the same value as the preset argument PV 260 WLP V9 90 Weg FLOWCHART Sinal cy 7 5 7 Calculation 7 5 7 1 COMP SYMBOL DATA 1 OPERATOR DATA 2 DESCRIPTION This block is formed by I EN input I ENO output and 4 arguments being format Operator data I data 2 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output goes to 1 depending on operator float 1 and float 2 As all data type of this block are float constant or float marker we recommend to use the blocks INT2FL and FL2INT Format The format is always constant and it can be integer or float pointing Operator The operator is always constant There are following otpions Equal to Different from Higher than gt Higher than or equal to gt Weg Language 261 Lower than lt Lower than or equal to lt
238. ow dadol low amp dado 2 word word amp word NOR m P g Language 265 resultado dado 1 dado 2 word word word NAND resultado low dadol low x dado 2 word word x word XNOR resultado low dadol low amp dado 2 word word amp word Shift result high result low data I high data 1 low gt gt data 2 double word double word gt gt word Data 2 is the quantity of shifting If its number is positive the shifting will be to left Dado 2 a quantidade de casas deslocadas sendo que quando dado 2 for positivo o deslocamento sera para a esquerda lt lt e quando dado 2 for negativo o deslocamento ser para a direita gt gt inserido zero nos bits deslocados A shift resultado high resultado low dado 1 high dadol low gt gt dado 2 double word double word gt gt word O operador Ashift tem o mesmo funcionamento do operador Shift com a diferen a que o sinal do dado 1 nao deslocado e nem alterado For the math instructions that use integer format WORD 16 bits with signal Negative Minimum 32768 Positive Maximum 32767 DOUBLE WORD 32 bits with signal Negative Minimum 2147483648 Positive Maximum 2147483647 Since a double word is represented by two distinct words it is necessary to understand how it works So a number represented in a double word will be t
239. ow PM to be inserted in the conversion bits USERFB parameter monitoring does not work for SoftPLC CFW11 Combobox error in the transfer to PM of the SoftPLC CFW 11 Modbus offset for SX and SW system markers are incorrect for PLC1 PLC2 and POS2 WLP V7 13 Beta Correction of VB7 12 functional deviations CFW11 SoftPLC the PID and FILTER blocks did not show the time base correctly The TON block time base was altered when a ladder page was inserted in the program The tag key of the CTENC block reset was not working When a block was removed the unnecessary monitoring boxes were not automatically erased Monitoring blocks moved themselves erratically when trying to rearrange them SRW1 the PM addresses for the TRANSFER block did not work correctly in the USERFB block ladder SRWI correction of the digital output addresses SRW1 an image for monitoring the digital outputs was included The fault that could cause the loss of the WLP tags while the Save or Save as commands of the Project menu were used was corrected New functions Tools for saving and restoring the WLP project back up were created A tool for exporting and importing applications was created SRW1 the MUX and DMUX blocks for use in the ladder were released PLC11 the PID and FILTER blocks for use in the USERFB block ladder were released Now an attempt to monitor incorrect equipment aborts the monitoring WLP
240. parameters UW Decimal points referenced according to the parameters P511 P513 P515 or P517 in teh configuration of user parameters UW Included SX3022 state of command run Included SX3023 force run SoftPIc Included SX3024 in quick stop Allow config Ts field of PID as MEF CFW701 Included SX3024 in quick stop Included SX3026 in bypass Included SX3028 in firemode Correction of V9 00 functional deviations New application was not showing the latest standard version of equipment TRANSFER Block floating point data was converted to integer MUX and DMUX block fixed system markers according to the equipment IMMEDIATE COIL fixed help that was not open CFW11 updated the EDS CFW700 changed V1 20 that does not exist to V1 22 CFW701 user parameters fixed items of engineering units eg Overview 15 SCA 06 inside USERFB block fixed data types on SRC field of TRANSFER block SCA06 inside USERFB block fixed INT2FL and FL2INT blocks to the float and double data types SCAO06 disabled monitoring of macro parameters SCA06 fix error code in the help of MC Power block WLP V9 00 New blocks SCA06 IMMEDIATE COIL 137 CTENC2 258 New functions Included version 1 20 of the SCA06 Upload decompiler function for SCA06 Added Jerk argument for the following blocks of the SCA06 MC Stop 142 MC MoveAbsolute 185 MC MoveR
241. peed of amotor OUT that is coupled to a pump Attached to the tubing of this pump there is a pressure sensor that feeds back FEEDBACK the inverter with a signal 4 to 20 mA proportional to the system pressure So when you increase the motor speed the line pressure increases When you decrease the motor speed so does the line pressure This is the objective of the PID control net modulate increase or decrease the motor speed so that a certain line pressure REFERENCE is maintained The ladder program can be didactically represented in the next figure REFERENCE TYFE 7 OFT FEEDBACK Figure PID block example pressure control Getting Help Fixing computer problems This section describes problems that may arise while this application is run VIDEO The recommended resolution is at least 800x600 This application has been designed to run in computers able to show 65536 colors or more Although this application run in system that show only 256 colors there will be a significant image quality reduction When the application is run with a resolution of 640x480 some of the larger graphics may be shown outside 356 WLP V9 90 Weg 11 2 the active window Thus is recommended to run this application with a resolution of 800x600 or better PERFORMANCE There are several ways to run this application faster Below some helpful hints to improve the performance of some applications in Windows For more
242. physical outputs in a unique operation LOGIC CALCULATION FORM The logics are calculated from top to bottom and from left to right as shown in the Ladder Diagram TRAJECTORY EXAMPLE Upe EE ER tats ts tr Ut g eee ere Project Architecture A project consists of a set of configurations and source files that all together determine the output file that you want SOURCE FILE The project is divided into several source files in the project directory The source files are as follows weg Overview 2 6 lt Project gt ldd source file lt Project gt mld USERFB source file lt Project gt wcn WSCAN source file CANOpen master configuration lt Project gt mol online monitoring file lt Project gt bus fieldbus network configuration lt Project gt ai file with the analog input tags lt Project gt ao file with the analog output tags lt Project gt di file with the digital input tags lt Project gt do file with the digital outputs tags lt Project gt mx file with the bit marker tags lt Project gt mw file with the float marker tags lt Project gt rw file with the read words tags lt Project gt rb file with the write words tags lt Project gt ww file with the read bytes tags lt Project gt wb file with the write bytes tags lt Project gt pp files with the tags of the programmable user parameters lt Project gt tp files with the tags of the memorized points
243. ping I is written in the bit marker 2001 during one scan cycle At the moment when the digital input 2 goes back to 0 the positioning will be able to be restarted 7 5 1 7 POSITIONO SYMBOL EN POSITIONS ENO MINSPEED DESCRIPTION This block has a function to execute a position control around 0 rpm or keeping the engine stopped 152 Ei WLP V9 90 It has 1 EN input 1 ENO output and I argument minimum speed unit 13 bits The EN input enables the block The ENO output inform when the block is active IMPORTANT block valid only for CFW700 V2 00 or above and the vector control with encoder active P0202 gt 5 FUNCTION If the EN input was 0 the block is not active and the ENO output is 0 When the EN input is to 1 the following conditions must be satisfied for the block POSITIONO becomes active The drive can not be disabled general and the parameter P0229 can not be set to 1 In this condition is generated the alarm A702 Can not be active other POSITIONO block The Module of speed reference must be less or equal than the minimum speed configured If the above conditions have been staisfied the block allocates the motor shaft in its current position Then the ENO output goes to 1 and remains in this state until the EN input remain in 1 When the block POSITIONO becomes active The command Run from SoftPIc is activated The speed reference from SoftPlc goes to 0 The pos
244. polation types the linear and the cubic Following equations are used Linear m PE _ PE Vy pim pim p in pim 66 WLP V9 90 Ei je 0 Cubic p atlpm pim b pm pir C e l pm pimi pie ve tat om pimi 4275 prm pimi oel yrn ae f a l pm pimi 2 tym l 3 je 6 a ve Were pe slave position ve slave speed ae Slave acceleration je Slave jerk pm master position vm master speed pim initial master position pfm final master position pie initial slave position pfe final slave position a coefficient calculated bit the CAM editor b coefficient calculated bit the CAM editor c coefficient calculated bit the CAM editor Changing one point in the cam profile One point in the cam profile can be changed through the point table by the direct editing or by moving the point in the chart To move the point in the chart place the cursor on the point which will be marked by a red square Click on this red square and maintain the mouse activated and draw it to the new position Clicking on the point the point table will be displaced to the desired point selecting the related cell The moving operation of the chart point is interactive The whole profile is calculated at every change of the point The new point can be viewed in the point table Removing a point in the cam profile The point is remover directly on the point table Select one of th
245. r Id 128 End Of Profile 127 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The InGear output informs the instant in which the block is active OPERATING MODE When the MC Camln block is executed the drive will star operating in position grid and remain this way even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Synchronized Motion BLOCK ERRORS Error Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Single when another block is active Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another block is waiting Drive in the Homing status MC block not executed Internal fault Invalid Cam Table ID First execute MC CamTableSelect for the Cam Table from 1 to 10 or MW CamCalc for Table from 11 to the 20 P202 different from 4 PLC EXAMPLE Weg Language 211 F l 2 3 4 5 T 5 J ol e000 ol e001 j KE Viral ren l Real Feal PA RATA Bini humberD fPoints Disable KI D1 S000 H MasterFoints Disable AT 2 lt MDLS010 M SlaveFoints Disshls 1 karwi3oz0 Curve Type CamTablelD op 1 3002 lao Periodic 3 ML 300 H Table SM ES002 PM 8001 alt S004 4 Execute 5 CamTablelC CommandA
246. r the number of PF PRINT FORMAT pulses has been received in a window specified by WIN WINDOW Thus the INDEX read will be valid only in the WIN e PF WIN clockwise or PF WIN and PF WIN counter clockwise PF must be configured with pulse value that REG should show after the 2 first INDEX s have been captured REG will not be changed longer If there is a greater difference than the value configured in WIN WINDOW the code 2 will be shown in ERR error code After the initialization the values achieved among the INDEX s will be compared with the PF value The value of this difference will be stored in DIFF DIFFERENCE If DIFF is higher than WIN the code 1 will be displayed in ERR SH will be changed to 1 only if the INDEX is received with lesser pulses than the PF and SH will be changed to lonly if the INDEX is received with more pulses than the PF NOTE When PF is set to 0 ERR WIN and SHIFT have no function The pulse difference module at each 2 INDEX is stored in DIFF Is the difference is positive SH changes to 1 Otherwise SH changes to 1 When AUTO AUTOMATIC is 0 the block operates in manual mode When 1 the automatic mode is enabled executing compensation and trying to bring DIFF to 0 The compensation is executed as function of the SHIFT value which is given by scan cycle After the third INDEX 1 e after the initialization the Q output changes to 1 and remains in this status while EN is and n
247. r window can not be created Why Memory error Action close application and start it again or restart the computer Fatal Error C2 directory not found 1 Why Internal error Action contact WEG Service or WEG Representative providing description and details about the error Fatal Error C3 compiler received non valid argument Why Internal error Action contact WEG Service or WEG Representative providing description and details about the error Fatal Error C4 file 1 can not be opened gt caused Why The file does not exist or can not be accessed file error Action based on the error cause try to eliminate it Fatal Error C5 directory 1 can not be created Why Hard Disk error Action reset computer and compiler Fatal Error C6 incorrect equipment 310 Ei WLP V9 90 8 3 Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Fatal Error C7 page number is not correct Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Fatal Error C8 file can not be opened Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action edit your program again and save it Fatal Error C9 overload of the internal resource memory destined for longs Why internal resource memory destined for WLP blocks exceeded its limit Action reduce program size Fatal Error C10 overload of the internal resource memory destined for byte
248. r11 Page 2 of 5 Functioning pages 1 and 2 The first two pages of the project are the same as the previous project which simply convert the analog input 4 20 mA into an engineering unit ol 407 ol 407 ol e407 352 10 ll l2 13 EN IMT2FL ENO ell WS00 MINT FLOAT PAMFYOLS MF9O1S 3 O00e 003 0 00e 000 CONVERT TUNNING PARAMETERS EP ETE ED oll Well HINT FLOAT amp AMFoO10 ol FSO10 i 1 O0e 002 oll Wiel HINT FLOAT r fk F9O1 1 Voll F9O11 l I Oe 002 EN IMT2FL ENO oI VWE0S MINT FLOAT PAMF9O12 oT F9012 i 1 O0e 002 WLP V9 90 Weg E 0 l 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 CONVERT SET POINT AND LIMIT 0 MAX M3407 EN SAT EHO IH OUT 0 FoO1S MAA MIN MLA 407 DATA 1 RES FM FOOD OPERATOR DATA 2 MLA 35407 DATA 1 RES ta FOO1 1 OPERATOR DATA 2 Abt S340 DATA 1 RES fol F9012 OPERATOR DATA 2 Figure Tutor 11 Page 3 of 5 Functioning page 3 On this page it is read the PID block set point which is adjusted via user s parameter P800 and limited to its value at the same scale as that of the analog input Also on this page it is read the Kp Ki and Kd gain of the PID block which are adjusted via user s parameter P801 P802 and P803 At this point they are divided by 100 in order to obtain a better adjustment resolution weg Tutorial 353 T 2 3 4 5 amp
249. r11 350 Tutor2 334 Tutor3 334 Tutor4 335 Tutors 336 Tutor6 336 Tutor7 339 Tutor8 343 Tutor9 347 Tutorial 316 317 320 321 322 332 334 335 336 339 343 347 348 350 U Undo 35 Units 34 Upload 69 USB 95 USERERR 55 277 USERFB 56 73 294 308 V Variables 71 82 84 97 104 Copyright 1999 2014 WEG All rights reserved
250. ration Active fr 066502 1000 00 H Deceleration CommandAborted 51006503 Error Desabilitado ErrorlD Desabilitado H Aborting H BurterMlode Rising H UpdateMode Tok 505 Execute PC love velocity Invelocity Li Velocity Acceleration Deceleration CommandAborted Error ErrorlD Bufferkode Update lode 226 Ei WLP V9 90 2HMX6500 de SF SS F oMXGS03 M m SF CO gt 2HMX6508 ee E a 2HMF9400 100 30 2HMX6504 2HMX6505 BHMX 506 2HMXGS07 Velocidade 200 100 80 In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6500 the first MC MoveVelocity block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the movement to reach the speed of 200 RPM starts At the moment the speed reaches 200 RPM the InVelocity output bit marker 6504 is set With the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6505 the second MC Move Velocity block is instantaneously executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the movement for the speed of 100 RPM starts at this moment the float marker 9400 contains the value 100 At the same time the Busy Active and InVelocity signals of the first block bit markers 6501 6502 and 6504 are reset
251. re reset The Done output bit marker 6509 will remain in 1 while the Execute input bit marker 6505 is set SINGLE In the attempt to execute a block programmed to SINGLE and if some other block is in execution this block will go into error 52 and will not be executed The HMI will show the alarm A00052 EXAMPLE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 a 9 Tavis elvis 4 Execute MC lowe Absolute Done FEAL RENE ETER 10 000000 H Fosition 200 00 Velocity 1000 00 H Acceleration 1000 00 H Deceleration ErrorlD f D abilitado ABORTING H BufferMode REITING H Updatelode Tal X6505 MAS 10 Execute MC love Absolute Done REAL REAL 15 000000 H Position KT HSOG 100 00 Velocity i oa eT BY 300 00 H Acceleration Command amp borted fr ACOA 500 00 H Deceleration Error Tut ErrorlD feet NOV 2400 SINGLE MBufferMode REING H UpdateMlode Ei Language 125 A O a i es A o Pt fe P EE es a 2HMX 6504 ae LOM TH MXGS07 ee o 254 MX6510 PL tii Velocidade VN LA Posicao 15 10 2HMX6505 2HMX6509 In the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 the first MC MoveAbsolute block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the positioning for position 10 revolutions starts With the transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6505 the second MC MoveAbsolute block starts but since the other block is
252. re version P0023 is not compatible with the software version used in developing of this application For the Motor Torque Center Winder application is necessary that the software version is greater than or equal to 2 05 2 Created the F797 fault to indicate that the control type P0202 is not compatible with the type necessary for this application For the Motor Torque Center Winder application is necessary to use vector control with encoder Application Motor Torque Center Winder Functional Deviations 1 In the monitoring dialog of the analog input parameters the value shown in P0021 AI4 was wrong 2 When enabled the center winder it was written 0 rpm at a speed reference and because of this the motor was stopped Modifications made in the current version of the application 1 Created the F799 fault to indicate that the CFW 11 software version P0023 is not compatible with the software version used in developing of this application For the Motor Torque Center Winder application is necessary that the software version is greater than or equal to 2 05 2 Created the F797 fault to indicate that the control type P0202 is not compatible with the type necessary for this application For the Motor Torque Center Winder application is necessary to use vector control with encoder WLP V9 10 New functions CFW700 V1 22 Engineering units referenced according to the parameters P510 P512 P514 or P516 in the configuration of user
253. reset The Done output bit marker 6509 will remain in 1 while the Execute input bit marker 6505 is set Weg Language 189 7 5 2 9 MC MoveRelative SYMBOL Execute MC MoveRelative Distance Vehocity Acceleration CommandAborted Deceleration Error ErrorlC Bufferklode Updateh ode DESCRIPTION It executes a positioning with the programmed distance When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments A positioning with the displacement configured in the Distance argument will be executed with a maximum speed configured in the Velocity argument and an acceleration deceleration configured in the Acceleration and Deceleration arguments Depending on the distance of the positioning and the acceleration and deceleration values the motor speed will not reach the maximum configured speed The direction of the positioning will depend on the configured distance signal If the distance is greater than zero the positioning will be in the positive direction clockwise and if the distance is smaller than zero the positioning will be in the negative direction counterclockwise When the positioning finishes the Done output goes to 1 for one scan cycle or while the Execute input is in l ARGUMENTS It is composed of 1 Execute input 1 Done output and 14 arguments which are Distance 118 Velocity 119
254. rgument will be set only if a set coil component is activated CHART P RESET COIL FIN 136 WLP V9 90 IT EQ EXAMPLE ol Tt SD Er Ek If the digital input I is 1 resets the user parameter 800 Otherwise the parameter value is maintained 7 4 5 PTS COIL SYMBOL P DESCRIPTION Consists of I input and I argument The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the current value is not saved in the ERPROM memory i e the last value is not restored In addition the even values correspond to 0 or false and the odd ones correspond to I or true OPERATION When there is a transition from 0 tol at the input signal the argument is set during the scan cycle Then the argument is reset even if its input remains at 1 CHART N POSITIVE TRANSITION SENSING COIL 1 SCAN CYCLE i SAMPLE 411 MX2000 When the digital input I commutates from 0 to 1 writes for I scan cycle into the bit marker 2000 Weg Language 137 7 4 6 7 4 7 NTS COIL SYMBOL NH DESCRIPTION Consists of I input and I argument The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the current value is not saved in the E2PROM memory 1 e the last
255. rlD Done TRUE Example Ei Language 285 AMLA6100 MAX6101 Execute ME ReadBinary Done 2 H SlaveAddress vO 6 100 KaadCoil H Function aViX6101 16000 MinitialDataSddress M6102 STW 8200 H MumberOfData IW S201 100 H Timeout oVIX6105 FALSE H Offset 7 5 10 3 MB WriteBinary Block that performs a writing of up to 128 binary data via Write Single Coil or Write Multiple Coils in a slave on the Modbus RTU network Execute ME writeBinary Slave Address Function InitialDataSddress MumberOrOata Timeout Offset Value Block Structure Name Description OO Operation When this block detects a leading edge on Execute it checks whether the Modbus RTU slave in specified address in SlaveAddress is free to send data Busy variable at FALSE level If so it sends the writing request of a number of bits indicated by NumberOfData in InitialDataAddress address using chosen function in Function and sets the Active output resetting it when receiving the response from the slave If the slave is not free the block waits Busy go to FALSE level to 286 WLP V9 90 Weg resubmit the request NOTE If Execute goes to FALSE level and Busy is still at TRUE level the request is canceled NOTE Value is an array of size equal to NumberOfData It is important to check this compatibility not to generate errors in the block When Execute has FALSE value Done remains F
256. rom this document may be changed without previous notice The names of companies products people characters and or data here mentioned are fictional and they do not intend in no way represent any people company product or effective events except when no mentioned No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording scanning or otherwise for any purpose except for personnel use without prior written permission of WEG Copies may be made only through electronic devices WEG may have patent protections patent applications trademarks copyrights or other intellectual property contained in this document The supply of this document does not grant any patent license trademarks copyrights or other intellectual property Products or company names here mentioned may be trademarks of the respective owners Weg Technical Support 357 12 Technical Support 12 1 Technical Support Your comments about WLP are welcome Please inform us how WLP has helped you to program your drive more efficiently WLP is available on our website See Download You can contact us at http www weg net or contact a local WEG branch or representative 358 WLP V9 90 Index A About 74 Address 38 39 Application 68 Applications 313 Arguments 114 AUTOREG 228 B Bar 37 38 Barras 38 Blocks 110 12
257. rray of 32 BYTE positions 16 WORD positions or 8 DWORD positions It is important to check this compatibility not to generate errors in the block When Execute has FALSE value Done remains FALSE The Done output is only activated when the block finishes executing successfully remaining at TRUE level until Execute receives FALSE If there is any error in the execution the Error output is enabled and ErrorlD displays an error code according to the table below Executed successfully Invalid input data Timeout in slave response Slave returned error Block Flowchart Master not enabled Ei Language 293 Rising edge in Execute Done FALSE Error FALSE ErrorlO 0 Done TRUE Example Execute TRUE Error TRUE Send write request according to Function Active TRUE Slave has answered or Timeout Active FALSE Update ErrorlD Done FALSE 294 WLP V9 90 Weg MAG 100 MAX6101 Execute ME vriteRegister Done l4 MSlaveAddress SG MX6100 WriteSingleRegister H Function NVOX6101 28000 MInitialDataAddress SahIX6102 STW S200 H MumberOfData IW S201 s 100 H Timeout FALSE H Offset SMW8202 M Value 7 5 11 USERFB SYMBOL ENO DESCRIPTION It is composed by 1 input EN I output ENO and 32 arguments as follows 16 input parameters PMO to PM15 16 input output parameters PM16 to PM31 The input EN
258. rrected eg Overview 19 WLP V7 22 Included V1 30 of CFW11 Final version for PLC11 01 WLP V7 21 Included V 1 30 of SRWOI Correction of V7 20 functional deviations Sometimes when the Print Preview function was used it could not quit WLP anymore When downloading a program with the ladder file closed if it was needed to compile an Illegal Operation was issued WLP V7 20 Final version for SRWO1 Check the modifications of the V7 10 Beta V7 11 Beta V7 12 Beta V7 13 Beta and V7 14 Beta versions Correction of VB7 14 functional deviations If more than one project is open with different equipment when changing from one project to another and executing the compile command in certain situations the address range of the other project was used causing a compilation error in several points because the addresses are not completely compatible ex one PLC2 project and one PLC11 project Illegal operation when the customized monitoring window was closed Optimized time to close the customized monitoring window User blocks USERFB were corrected so that they are compatible with the PLC1 PLC2 POS2 PLC11 and CFW11 equipment In certain situations online monitoring did not open which loaded different communication configurations from the macros or the subprograms Illegal operation when converting a project with a macro Compiler generated invalid program for the 0 5X versions
259. rst Last Qtd CANOpen RS4000 Status 2 103 RS4127 CANOpen WC4136 Contol 2 103 WC4137 Address Table CF W700 CF W701 CT W900 CARTOES EQUIPAMENTOS men Cane CFW700 CFW701 CTW900 First Otd First First Qtd Last Last Retentive Bit Markers Volatile Bit MX5000 1100 MX5000 MX5000 Markers MX6099 MX6099 MX6099 Retentive Word Markers Volatile Word MX8000 MX8000 MX8000 Markers MX8199 MX8199 MX8199 System Bit SX3000 SX3000 SX3000 Markers 1 10 SX3040 SX3040 SX3040 System Word SW3000 SW3000 SW3000 Markers 1 10 SW3024 SW3024 SW3010 Retentive Float Markers Volatile Float MF9000 MF9000 200 Markers MF9199 MF9199 Retentive Double z E Markers Volatile Double E Markers User Parameters UWI1010 50 UW1010 90 UWI1010 50 UW1059 UW1059 UW1059 System PW 1000 4 PW 1000 4 PW 1000 3 Parameters JPW 1003 JPW 1003 JPW 1002 Drive Parameters PD0000 1000 PD0000 PD0000 EENE 4 PD0999 Board s Digital Weg Language 103 Inputs Drive s Digital IX1 Inputs 1X8 Expansion s Digital Inputs Board s Digital Outputs Drive s Digital QX1 Outputs QXS5 Expansion s Digital Outputs Board s Analog Inputs Drives Analog IW I Inputs IW2 Expansion s Analog Inputs Board s Analog Outputs Drives Analog QW I Outputs QW2 Expansion s Analog Outputs USERFB PMO Para
260. s 270 WLP V9 90 EXAMPLE IW101 SMSO EN INT 2FL ENO SMNVSD00 MINT FLOAT F9000 0 MFRAC 2 MF9000 MIN OUT AF9001 1 002 004 HMAS 2 002 004 NIN The value contined at the analog input of the drive is transferred to the word marker 6000 which is then canverted to the float marker 9000 The value read at the analog input is a value between 0 and 32767 The SAT block causes that the float marker 9001 stays between these limits values programmed 7 5 7 5 MUX SYMBOL DESCRIPTION It has 1 EN input I ENO output and 17 arguments where bit 0 to 15 word The EN input is responsable to enable the block The ENO output inform if the block is running BIT 0a 15 The bit argument is formed by 1 data type and 1 address The data type can be Ei Language 271 desable constant bit marker digital input digital output user parameter WORD The word argumet is formed by data type and 1 address The data type can be user parameter word parameter FUNCTION The EN input always transfer its value to the ENO output While the EN was 1 the block is running If the block was enabled the valu of the word argument will be created by the values existing on bit 0 to 15 arguments EXAMPLE 21 AU WS01 sM 1 O00 ol W000 MX 1 O01 ol 1 O02 MA 1003 ole 1 O04 sM 1OOS MLA 1 O06 MA LOO ole 1008 MLA 1009 MA 1010 MX 1011 MX O12 aM 1013
261. s Drive s QX101 QX101 3 QX1 11 QX1 3 Digital QX103 QX103 QX103 QX11 104 QX3 Outputs Board s Analog Inputs Drive s IW 101 Analog Inputs IW102 IW 102 Boards Analog Outputs Drive s QW 101 QW 101 2 Analog QW 102 QW 102 QW 102 Outputs USERFB PMO PMO PMO Parameters PM31 PM31 PM31 Read Words RWO 2 103 RW31 Write Words TWWO 32 s 2 103 WW31 Read Bytes RBO 32 2 2 1108 RB3I 32 f 3 OT Weg Language 99 BOARDS PLC1 V2 0X PLC2 V1 5X POS2 V1 6X SOFTPLC V2 0X SOFTPLC V1 4X DATA TYPE CFW g CFW e SCA 05 ER EN First First First ER EN Last Last Last Qty Write Bytes 7 WBO 2 103 WB31 me Ea Status am Ea CANOpen WCO Contol 2 103 WCI1 100 WLP V9 90 Address Table PLC11 01 PLC11 02 SRW01 PTC SRW01 RCD and SCA06 BOARDS PLC11 01 V1 4X SRW01 PTC SCA06 V1 0X PLC11 02 V1 4X V4 0X CFW 11 SRW01 RCD DATA TYPE V4 0X First First First Last Qty Last Qty Last Qtd Retentive Bit MX6100 384 7 MX6000 2000 Markers MX6483 MX7999 4 104 Volatile Bit MX6500 1488 MX6100 1408 MX8000 2000 Markers MX7987 MX7507 MX9999 4 104 Retentive MW8200 MW1200 1000 Word Markers MW8399 0 4 104 MW 1299 Volatile Word Z7MW8400 MW8200 650 ZMW1300 2000 Markers MW8999 MW8849 0 4 104 AMW 1499 System Bit SX3000 SX3000 SX3064 Marker
262. s Why internal resource memory destined for WLP blocks exceeded its limit Action reduce program size Errors See below the description of the Compiler Errors Error C101 incorrect header version Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Error C103 incorrect software version Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Error C103 incorrect body version Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Error C104 non existing address Why the field Address is empty Action fill out the field Address with a valid address Error C105 unknown cell type Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Error C106 unknown function block type Why Source file lt Project gt LDD is corrupted Action create a new program Error C107 undefined element in the instruction list Why internal error Action contact WEG Service or WEG Representative providing description and details about the error Error C108 non valid line Why Source file contains non valid characters Action save and close the program restart the program again Error C109 vertical connection with right connection Weg Compiler 311 Why This version does not accept right connection Action delete the vertical connection Error C110 vertical connection without connection
263. s 1 SX3111 SX3006 SX3070 103 System Word SW3300 SW3300 SW3404 Markers 1 SW3404 SW3408 103 Retentive M92000 200 MF16000 500 Float Markers MF9399 MF16499 4 104 Volatile Float MF9400 MF9000 175 79 MF17000 1000 Markers MF9999 MFO174 MF17999 4 104 Retentive Double Markers Volatile Double Markers User UW 1300 Parameters UW 1499 System JPW 1200 Parameters PW1299 Drive PDO Parameters PD1049 Boards IX101 Digital Inputs IX109 Drive s IX1 6 IX1 3 Digital Inputs IX6 IX3 pp Weg Language 101 BOARDS PLC11 01 V1 4X SRW01 PTC SCA06 V1 0X PLC11 02 V1 4X V4 0X DATA TYPE SRW01 RCD First Qty Qtd Expansion s Digital Inputs IX312 Board s Digital Outputs Drive s Digital Outputs QX3 Expansion s Digital Outputs Board s IW 101 1 Analog Inputs Drives IW1 2 IW I Analog Inputs IW2 KIWI Expansion s IW2 1 Analog Inputs IW2 Board s QW 101 Analog QW 102 Outputs Drive s QW 1 2 Analog QW2 Outputs Expansion s Analog Outputs USERFB PMO 32 Parameters PM31 Read Words RW4200 231103 RW4299 Write Words W W4600 23103 WW4699 Read Bytes RB4400 2 103 RB4499 Write Bytes 9 WB4800 2 103 WB4899 102 WLP V9 90 Weg BOARDS PLC11 01 V1 4X SRW01 PTC SCA06 V1 0X PLC11 02 V1 4X V4 0X DATA TYPE CFW 11 SRW01 RCD i Fi
264. s the instant in which the block is finished OPERATING MODE When the MC StepLimitSwitch block is executed the drive will operate in position grid and remain this way even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Homing and will remain this way until the execution of the MC StepRefPulse MC StepDirect or MC FinishHoming blocks BLOCK ERRORS Error der id Speed programmed below the minimum allowed Speed programmed above the maximum allowed Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status P202 different from 4 PLC Status of the Drive different from Standstill or Homing Digital inputs 1 2 and 3 not configured according to LimitSwitchMode KM 6 Drive in the Stopping status EXAMPLE Weg Language 199 0 l 2 3 4 5 6 T 2 a oh 6500 MLA GS03 D Execute MC StepLimitSwitch Done Real Feal l MC Negative Direction SMS 501 MC_EdgeOn H LimitSwitchMlode i aM ee 502 100 00 H Velocity Command4borted Desabilitada 5 Error fr Desabilitado ErrorlD r Desabilitado z With the transition from 0 to I of bit marker 6500 the MC_StepLimitSwitch block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the search of the LimitSwitch starts In case 1 when the block is exec
265. se direction of rotation is triggered and the digital output I is reset If the digital input I is 216 WLP V9 90 eg driven any one of the two previous movements that is active is cancelled and the motor stops and both outputs and 2 are reset 7 5 3 2 JOG SYMBOL ROTATION SPEED ACCELERATION AAIS DESCRIPTION It is formed by I EN input I ENO output and 4 arguments being F 116 speed 115 acceleration 118 axis 116 The EN input enables this block OPERATION If the EN input is 0 this block is not executed the ENO output remains at 0 If the EN input goes and no other movement block is active the block starts a trapezoidal profile based on the characteristics programmed in the arguments and then keeps in the desired velocity until the EN input goes 0 then starts the deceleration When the speeds reaches the zero value the block has been finished the ENO output goes I for one scan cycle and then returns to 0 NOTE The JOG speed does not change unless you start another move Important This block work in speed loop and remains in this status when the block has been finished FLOWCHART Ei Language Is there one positioning active Has it been run In this scan cycle Finish the block CHART EN JOG 4 SPEED AT MIN 1 SCAN CYCLE JENO 1 SCAN CYLCE EXAMPLE is this block Run the black 7 217 ENO 0
266. seShift 360 d 0 Velocidade With the position synchronism of the Real Shaft with the Quick Counter through the MC_GearInPos block and with the occurrence of a transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6502 the MC_Phasing block is executed and a displacement of 0 05 revolution is applied to the master shaft resulting in a pulse in the speed The Done output bit marker 6503 is set while the Execute input is set Ei 238 WLP V9 90 7 5 4 6 MC GearOut SYMBOL Execute ML GearOut DESCRIPTION It finishes the synchronism MC_GearIn or MC_GearInPos blocks on the programmed shaft When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be executed and the existing synchronism will be finished The shaft will keep the speed of the moment in which the block is executed ARGUMENTS It is composed of I Execute input I Done output and 5 arguments which are Slave 118 Busy 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the synchronism is finished OPERATING MODE When the MC GearOQut block is executed the drive does not operate in position grid In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Continuous Motion BLOCK ERRORS Error as Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status 71 P202 different from 4 PLC Drive is not in the Synchronized Motion
267. serted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 6 3 CTU ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC CTU TE Standard Toolbar ja FUNCTION Inserts a Counter Up 247 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 6 4 PID ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC PID F Standard Toolbar Fy FUNCTION Inserts a PID 250 element DESCRIPTION 52 WLP V9 90 Weg You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 6 5 FILTER ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC FILTER Standard Toolbar FUNCTION Inserts a Filter 253 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function block by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the Function block cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 7 6 6 CTENC ACCESS Menu Insert Function Blocks PLC CTENC 1 3 Standard Toolbar r e FUNCTION Inserts a Encoder Counter 255 element DESCRIPTION You can insert the function blo
268. set SX3 Analog Input Alarm SWO Drive Speed Return rpm SWI1 Drive Speed Return 13 bits KSW2 Generate User Error SW3 Board Error Return SW4 104 Drive Logic Command SW5 105 Drive Logic State Return SW6 Encoder Input Speed Return rpm PSWT Reference Speed Return rpm SW4 Drive Logic Command PLC1 PLC2 The Word that defines the logic command is formed by 16 bits 8 high bits and 8 low bits having the following construction Weg Language 105 High bits select the function to be activated when set to 1 Bit 15 Drive Error Reset Bit 14 No function Bit 13 Save P169 P170 parameter modifications in theEEPROM Bit 12 Local Remote command Bit 11 JOG command Bit 10 Direction of rotation Bit 09 General Enabling Bit 08 Start Stop Low bits determine the desired status for the functions selected with the high bits Bit 7 Drive Error Reset every transition from 01 causes thedrive errors to be reset except for E24 E25 E26 and E27 Bit 6 No function Stop detection It is not necessary to activatethe corresponding high bit refer to parameter P310 description Bit 5 Save P169 P170 in the EEPROM 0 Save 1 Not tosave Bit 4 Local Remote command 0 Local 1 Remote Bit 3 JOG command 0 Inactive 1 Active Bit 2 Direction of rotation 0 Counter clockwise 1 Clockwise
269. simun number of points 5 Master rot Slawe rot 0 Linear 0 000000 Linear 10 000000 Linear 0 000000 Master Speed 1 0000 Cursor Values Master 0 500000 Slave 0 000000 Speed 0 000000 Acceleration 01000000 rpm s ol 02 03 of 05 os 07 O8 9 Jerk g000000 Tes ajaja lr s a samaj aal ox cme After the download of the user program the value 3 will be loaded into the MW6000 word marker The values 0 75 0 95 and 1 0 into the MF9500 MF9501 and MF9502 float markers respectively The values 0 0 10 0 and 0 0 into the MF9503 MF9504 and MF9505 float markers respectively And the values 0 linear interpolation 0 and O into the MX1000 MX1001 and MX1002 bit markers respectively When it is necessary to change a point of a calculable profile it is enough to change the desired points at the respective defined markers and to execute the CALCCAM block In this example in order to change the toy CAM profile previously demonstrated it is enough to load the new values into the mentioned markers and to execute the CALCCAM block Important The CALCCAM block will not be executed if a CAM block were active and the error E68 will be generated on its attempt When executing the CALCCAM block with a marker used in the CAM profile containing an improper value on the attempt of executing this CAM profile the error E53 will be generated and this CAM block will not be executed Improper Values Number of
270. sing ladder language command and monitor the following equipaments e PLCI optional boards for the CFW 09 series e PLC2 optional boards for the CFW 09 series e POS2 optional boards for the SCA 05 series e SoftPLC of the CFW 11 series e SoftPLC of the SSW 06 series e PLC11 01 optional board for the CFW 11 series e PLC11 02 optional board for the CFW 11 series e SRWOI PTC relay e SRWOI ROD relay e SoftPLC of the SCA 06 series The main characteristics of the software are listed below 26 Ei WLP V9 90 2 3 e Program edition using many ladder function blocks e Compilation of the ladder program to a board compatible language e Transfer of the compiled program to the boards e Receive of the program from the boards 1 261 e Online monitoring of the program that is running on the board e Point to point RS 232 Serial or USB 2 26 communication with the boards e Multi drop RS 485 Serial Communication with up to 30 boards since a RS 232 to RS 485 converter is used e Online Help for all software functions and blocks 1 Olny for SoftPLC of CFW 11 SoftPLC of SSW 06 PLC11 01 and PLC11 02 2 USB only avaliable for SoftPLC of CFW 11 PLC11 01 PLC11 02 SRWO1 PTC SRWO1 RCD and SoftPLC of SCA06 NOTE This help has a basic training tutorial for WLP software programming Its reading is recommended for those who are not familiar with the Ladder language Installation and initialization of
271. sition reference RXCANWEG SYMBOL IN RXCANVEG 6 SPEED FOSITION DESCRIPTION It consists of 1 EN input I ENO output and 2 arguments as follows speed float marker where the speed will be received position float marker where the position will be received The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output changes to 1 whilst the block is reading the data of the CANWEG network OPERATION As soon the block is enabled the speed and the position data read by the CANWEG network will be stored in their respective float markers EXAMPLE M1000 IN RsCANWEG 68 SFEED POSITION ol 9000 Vol F200 1 SDO SYMBOL ADDRESS RESULT Read FUNC OLT HIGH Write INDEX OUT Low SUB IND SIzE TIMEOUT DESCRIPTION It is composed by one EN input one ENO out put and 9 arguments which are ADDRESS CANopen network node address 280 Ei WLP V9 90 FUNC Functionn read or write INDEX Index of the object that is to be read or written decimal SUB IND Sub Index of the object that is to be read or written decimal SIZE Size of the object that is to be read or written decimal TIMEOUT Time of waiting in ms for reading or writing the value RESULT Result of the block execution 0 Successfully executed I Card cannot execute the function Example master not enabled 2 Timeout on hold for the master response 3 Node returened error OUT HIGH The mo
272. st point of this CAM curve The position of the master in the other points will be according to the content of the double markers following the selected one for example if the configured double marker is the double marker 18010 the position of the master axis in the first point will be the content of double marker 18010 the position of the master axis in the second point will be the content of double marker 18011 and so on The value of the content of the double marker must be programmed in revolutions EXAMPLE 1 5 revolutions 2 125 revolutions and 10 025 revolutions In case the position of the master of some point is smaller than or equal to the position of the master of the previous point an error will occur in the block SLAVE POINTS Used in the MC blocks Movement Control Double marker that configures the position of the slave of the first point of this CAM curve The position of the slave in the other points will be according to the content of the double markers following the selected one for example if the configured double marker is the double marker 18020 the position of the slave axis in the first point will be the content of double marker 18020 the position of the slave axis in the second point will be the content of double marker 18011 and so on The value of the content of the double marker must be programmed in revolutions EXAMPLE 1 5 revolutions 2 125 revolutions and 10 025 revolutions CURVE TYPE Used in the MC b
273. st significant value of the read object OUT LOW The least significant value o the read object IN HIGH The most significant value to be written on the object OUT HIGH The least significant value to be written on the object The EN input is responsible for enabling the block The ENO output goes to after executing the block OPERATION If the EN input is zero he block is not executed If the EM input suffers a transition from 0 to 1 the card will send a message via CANopen network to the network node according to the programmed arguments If the block is programmed for reading the card will require the node and the value informed by the node will be saved in the output arguments If the block is saved for writing the input arguments will be written on the object correspondent to the node After the execution of the block the ENO output goes to 1 and only returns to zero after the EN input returns to zero EXAMPLE Reading of the DC voltage of the SCA 05 Through the WSCAN software it is verified that the DC voltage of the SCA 05 corresponds to the 20004h hexadecimal object which in decimal is equal to 8196 The object being an INTEGER 16 then the number of bytes 2 Network WSCAN Master ID 1 lt Masterl gt Bandrate 1000 Ebitls PLC2 Ber 130 a Node ID 2 lt Hode2 gt m SCA 05 220 2304 4 84 Rev 210 Objects Dictionary WSCAN Ei Language 281 7 5 10 7 5 10 1 Object
274. stion After USERFB depuration you can use as many calls as necessary limited to the board programming capacity i Situation 4 When the input ON is false the output OUT remains on since the USERFB is still enabled IX1 is on and the input OFF is also false os an RETEM ENO gje Mola OUT Put EN OFF Monitoring of the USERFB internal situation m gt g Language 305 ol MO ok Nl PMI WPML Situation 5 When the input OFF is true the output OUT does not turn off since the USERFB block is disabled IX1 is off 7 IK ON is TEA OUT POEZ IZZAH OFF Situation 6 When the input OFF is true the output OUT is turned off ee l s H ON OUT PAEA SLA OFF Monitoring of the USERFB internal situation oF MO oF M1 oF M16 oF M16 The following figure presents an example of how to use a USERFB in multiple calls All the USERFB calls execute the same ladder diagram but in an independently way according to the operators programmed for the USERFB 306 WLP V9 90 Ei 7 Voll A 407 se oll H OM OUT i al ole OFF i el 3906 SE TZ oo H ON OUT Agia od ww OFF i m gt g Language 307 7 5 12 MMC SYMBOL START MOTOR1 STARTING STOF BYPASS FAULT SRC1 DST1 SREZ DST2 MOTORZ STARTING BYPASS DST1 DST2 MOTORS STARTING BYPASS DST 1 BET DESCRIPTION This block is composed by I inp
275. t error automatic reference re feed Reverse error re feed automatic reference Gains The gains are formed by 3 parts float 117 proportional gain Kp float 117 integral gain Ki float 1171 derivative gain Kd OPERATION The EN input always transfers its value to the ENO output The block is executed while the EN input 1 Otherwise the arguments are reset Attention For PLC1 PLC2 e POS2 at maximum two PID blocks may be active simultaneously When a third block is present no one will be executed even when they are active at the EN input DIAGRAM BLOCK PAR ALLEL Manual reference reference low pass control automatic manual feedback 252 Ei WLP V9 90 ACADEMIC mangal reference reference control automatic 0 manual 1 feedback Definition e filtered reference feedback u control output Kp proportional gain Ki integral gain inverse of integral time 1 T1 Kd derivative gain derivative time DISCRETE EQUATIONS Academic u k u k 1 Kp 1 Ki Ts Kd Ts e k Kd Ts e k 1 Parallel u k u k 1 Kp Ki Ts Kd Ts e k Kd Ts e k 1 So Ts sample time EXAMPLE Ei Language 253 7 5 6 5 MX2000 EN INTZFL EMO aT WOO MINT FLOAT fr ti FSO00 MX2000 W101 MWEDDD lt M W O00 HINT FLOAT gt b4MF9001 MX2000 EN PIO ENO
276. t goes to I and remains while the block is active It order to finish the block it is necessary the execution of another block or the changing of the drive to the Disabled or Errorstop status ARGUMENTS It consists of 1 Execute input 1 InVelocity output and 13 arguments which are Velocity 119 Aceleration 119 Deceleration 119 Buffer Mode 119 Update Mode 126 Busy 1128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The InVelocity output informs the instant in which the programmed speed is reached OPERATING MODE When the MC Move Velocity block is executed the drive does not operate in position grid In the execution of the movement the shaft status will change to Continuous Motion BLOCK ERRORS Error ee Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Single when another block is active 60 Speed programmed below the minimum allowed Speed programmed above the maximum allowed Ei Language 225 Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another block is waiting P202 different from 4 PLC EXAMPLE KM Drive in the Homing status ks L f F cms T oo iD 0 1 aNX6500 200 00Mvelosity ae CRT 1000 00 WM Accele
277. t is 1 the search is started in the opposite direction as programmed until the ZEROSW input changes to 0 At this moment the block reverses the direction of rotation and repeats the steps described in the item above When the block is finished the found position will be referenced to the programmed offset value that is usually zero If we program a negative offset with 25 revolutions and we execute a relative positioning with 50 revolutions and 0 fraction of revolution with positive signal the final position would be 25 revolutions and 0 fraction with positive signal However if the positioning is in absolute mode the end position would be of 50 revolutions and 0 fraction of revolution with positive signal and in fact 75 revolutions in clockwise direction of rotation would be done NOTE The homing position depends on the value of the parameter 769 that causes a position advance regarding to the zero pulse ATTENTION After the homing the control remains in position loop 162 WLP V9 90 Ei FLOWCHART HOME Is there one Hositioning activez Y Eis eck Was there a N positive transition on ZEROSW Input Zero pulse reached return to zero position positive Is positioning finished finish the block Y Y SE start positioning CHART weg Normal condition ZEROSW 0 N HOME EROSW line MINIMUM 1 SCAN CYCLE Depending on P769
278. t that will be showed when the information key of the USERFB property box is pressed This file has an rtf format and can be edited by means of an advanced editor directly in the folder where the USERFB has been stored After the new USERFB has been configured its ladder diagram window can be closed and then the main program ladder diagram that calls the USERFB must appear in the following way LE EE ON OUT OFF Now the USERFB block is represented with the options and definitions that were given to it The properties box will have the following aspect by double clicking the USERFB block Call Macro x Information Open Create Remove The USERFB name is described as follows USERFB Location USERFB Name The USERFB Location has two options available WLP or the project name WLP option means that the USERFB is stored in the USERFB library as described previously and can be accessed by other projects By clicking on the options Input Parameters and Output Parameters the properties box will have the following aspect l 302 WLP V9 90 Call Macro i Dwn Digital Input 1 3 Drive Digital Input 101 106 se Dan Digital Output 1 6 2 Drive Digital Output 101 103 After defining the input and output parameters the ladder diagram will have the following aspect ole 1 SAE l vaia MALI NED Now compiling the main program which will also compile the USERF
279. t type data was released in order to allow the creation of a ladder routine that accesses specific drive parameter as a function of the equipment WLP VB7 10 New supported equipments PLC11 01 SRWOI For more details refer to block compatibility 110 and data types 97 For the SRWOI relay verify the new functions below New functions Project tree 29 x P 31 gt New blocks RTC 246 real time clock USERERR 277 it generates user error Several modifications MACRO block was renamed to USEREB 294 Correction of V7 01 functional deviations During the compilation a fatal error is generated for blocks with two inputs when one is connected directly to the left bar WLP V7 01 Correction of functional deviations V7 00 Online monitoring of CFW 11 SoftPLC V1 00 showed values captured in the middle of scan cycle This deviation generate incorrect transitions on monitoring values Note This correction was done with firmware V1 01 of CFW 11 WLP V7 00 Supported new equipments CFW 11 SoftPLC SSW 06 SoftPLC For more details verify the block compatibility 110 and data type 97 New functions USB communication 95 with the CFW 11 SoftPLC 22 WLP V9 90 Weg Upload decompiler 69 It is possible to read the ladder program from the CFW 11 SoftPLC and from the SSW 06 SoftPLC Configuration possibility for the presentation format of the numeric
280. tInput Real Ratiokumerator TAS 04 RatioDenominator i vaksa Acceleration CommandAborted f 06308 Deceleration Error Desabilitado ErrorlD De sabilitado Buffer lode m gt g Language 233 BH M6500 26 MX6501 tis 24 MX6502 Tes EE 2HMX6503 t ee ip tom Er to ee SEE SEE TT E Wo MX6S04 Mo MXG6S05 Vo MXAGS06 Dok 6507 1 EE y LHAX6508 l EE A d S ee ee Velocidade elxo mestre 200 In the transition from 0 to I of bit marker 6500 the first MC_GearIn block is executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6501 and 6502 respectively are set and the search of the synchronism with the configured acceleration starts As the ratio configured is 1 2 and the master shaft is at 200 RPM the slave shaft must reach 100 RPM to establish the synchronism At the moment in which the speed reaches 100 RPM the InGear output bit marker 6504 is set With the transition from 0 to I of bit marker 6505 the second MC_GearIn block is instantly executed thus the Busy and Active signals of this block bit markers 6506 and 6507 respectively are set and the search of the synchronism with the configured deceleration starts As the ratio configured is 1 4 and the master shaft is at 200 RPM the slave shaft must reach 50 RPM to establish the synchronism At the same time the Busy Active and InGear signals of the first block bit markers 6501 6502 and 6504 are reset and the Comman
281. the Stopping status P202 different from 4 PLC Status of the Drive different from Standstill or Homing EXAMPLE l 3 4 5 T g F ol GS00 ol 6S 1 1 Execute MC StepLimitSwitch Done Real Feal l MC Negative H Direction Desabilitado MC EdgeOn H LimitSwitchMlode i Desabilitado 100 00 W velocity Command4borted He Desabilitado 2 Error Desabilitado ErrorlD fe Desabilitado 3 wM pear i eA 4 Execute MC StepRerPulse Done Feal Feal 5 MC Positive H Direction Desabilitada 100 004 Velocity i Desabilitado 10 500000 W SetPosition Command 4borted He Desabilitado z Error Desabilitado ErrorlD Desabilitada 7 RefPulse case 1 ae case 2 MH MC StepRefPulse MC StepLimitSwitch In the transition from 0 to I of the bit marker 6500 the MC StepLimitSwitch block is executed and the AbsSwitch search starts In case 1 when the block is executed the LimitSwitch is not activated since the Direction argument is configured as MC Negative the movement will be in the negative direction When a falling edge occurs 202 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 5 2 13 in LimitSwitch SwitchMode MC_EdgeOn the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred In case 2 when the block is executed the LimitSwitch is activated but even with the Direction argument configured as MC Negative the movement will be in the positive direction and when leaving the
282. the Enable function option 1 or an Alarm may occur ARGUMENTS It is composed of 1 Enable input 1 Status output and 5 arguments which are Buffer Mode 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 The Enable input is responsible for enabling disabling the real shaft Weg Language 139 The Status output informs the status of the real shaft The Buffer Mode argument can be Aborting when the command for disabling Enable 0 the real shaft will be immediately disabled Buffered when the command is for disabling Enable 0 the real shaft will be disabled only when all the movement blocks finish OPERATION MODE When enabling the real shaft for the first time the drive may operate in position grid depending on the value of parameter P0773 The position proportional gain P0159 must be set to obtain a better drive performance When the real shaft is disabled the shaft status will be Disabled When enabling the real shaft the shaft status will change to Standstill BLOCK ERRORS Drive in the Errorstop status Drive with Fault 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 i M6500 HMX6501 Buffer lode bo ahi O2 TakLA6503 Execute MC Move Absolute Real 10 000000 H Position 200 00 Velocity Active 1000 00 H Acceleration CommandAborted 1000 00 H Deceleration Error ErrorlO Aborting MButterklode RISING H Updatebode Ei 140 WLP V9 90 o
283. the WLP INSTALLATION To install the WLP software on your computer using the product CD complete the following steps 1 Insert the CD ROM on the source drive 2 Though My Computer icon explore the CD ROM 3 Find the wlp X YZ setup exe file and execute it 4 Follow the setup instructions It is also possible to download the WLP software from the WEG website http www weg net After downloading the WLP installer a ZIP format file extract the files to a temporary folder before running the installation program To extract the ZIP file you can use the Zip software http www 7 zip org or the WinZip software gr Your files have now been extracted to the folder you specified Go to the temporary folder and run the WLP installer wlp X YZ setup exe by double clicking it INITIALIZATION Perform the following main steps to create a new program and transfer it to the board 1 Open the WLP 2 Choose the option New Project 3 Choose a name for the project 4 Start programming by using the commands available on the edition bar 5 After finishing the program press lt F7 gt or select Menu Built Compile in order to compile the program and correct the errors if necessary 6 Connect the PC cable to the board 7 Configure the communication by selecting the port the board network address and the baud rate lt Shift gt lt F8 gt or under Menu Communication Configurations NOTE Always use No parity option 8
284. the current value CV in saved value CV can be through bit marker digital input user s parameters leading edge DI3 falling edge DI3 leading edge Z counter 1 falling edge Z counter I leading edge Z counter 2 falling edge Z counter 2 Note The saving by leading falling edge DI3 is only allowed when the counting source SRC is the Quick Counter DI1 DI2 The saving by leading falling edge Z is only allowed when the counting source SRC is Quick Counter I EEN1 EEN2 or Counter 2 EEN2 Restart When the CV value reaches the Restart value CV is reset and the Reset Occurred argument goes to I for I scan cycle returning to 0 later Encoder SRC It determines which encoder will be count the pulses Quick Counter DI1 DI2 Counter I EEN1 EEN2 Counter 2 EEN2 Reset Occurred When the reset of CV occurs Reset Occurred goes to 1 for 1 scan cycle returning to 0 later Save Occurred When the saving of CV in SV occurs Save Occurred goes to for 1 scan cycle returning to 0 later Current value CV It informs the quantity of pulses counted by the block Saved value SV When the programmed event occurs the value contained in CV is saved in SV and the Save Occurred argument goes to for 1 scan cycle returning to 0 later OPERATION If the EN input is zero the output arguments are not changed If the EN input is 1 the current value argument CV is zeroed in the positive transition of EN and then the c
285. the status bar NEG COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils NEG COIL Edit Toolbar ate FUNCTION Inserts a negated coil 133 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to WLP V9 90 Weg 44 the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 6 3 SET COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils SET COIL StaEditndard Toolbar ae FUNCTION Inserts a set coil 134 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 6 4 RESET COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils RESET COIL Edit Toolbar 26 FUNCTION Inserts a reset coil 135 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on the status bar 3 5 6 5 PTS COIL ACCESS Menu Insert Coils PTS COIL Edit Toolbar BG FUNCTION Inserts a positive transition coil 136 element DESCRIPTION You can insert a coil by clicking with the left mouse button on the desired position If the cursor changes to the symbol Not Allowed the coil cannot be inserted and an information is written on t
286. tioNumerator 11 RatioDenominator 118 Aceleration 119 Deceleration 119 Buffer Mode 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The InSync output informs the instant in which the synchronism is established OPERATING MODE m gt g Language 235 When the MC_GearInPos block is executed the drive will start operating in position grid and remain this way even after the conclusion of the block The position proportional gain must be set P0159 so as to obtain a better drive performance In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Synchronized Motion BLOCK ERRORS Drive in the Disabled or Errorstop status Drive in the Stopping status Attempt to execute block with BufferMode Buffered when another block is active and another block is waiting P202 different from 4 PLC Invalid synchronism ratio Drive in the Homing status 7 5 4 5 MC Phasing SYMBOL Execute ML Phasing Phase Shift Velocity Acceleration CommandAborted Deceleration Error Error DESCRIPTION It executes a displacement on the programmed master shaft When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input a displacement will be executed on the master shaft position according to the value of PhaseShift 236 Ei WLP V9 90 ARGUM
287. to insert a comment on WLP DIALOG Cancel Help Weg Language 131 7 3 7 3 1 7 3 2 Contacts NO CONTACT SYMBOL HH DESCRIPTION Consists of 1 input 1 output and 1 argument The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital input digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the even values correspond to 0 while the odd ones correspond to I OPERATION When its argument value is 1 it transfers the signal contained in its input to its output Otherwise it transfers 0 to the output CHART Va NO CONTACT EXAMPLE NL 000 Ll NC I1000 Jf If the bit marker 2000 and the digital input 1 is 0 writes I in the bit marker 1000 Otherwise writes 0 NC CONTACT SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Consists of 1 input 1 output and 1 argument 132 Ei WLP V9 90 7 4 7 4 1 The argument consists of one data type and one address The argument data type may be bit marker digital input digital output user parameter NOTE In the user parameter option the even values correspond to 0 while the odd ones correspond to I OPERATION When its argument value is 0 it transfers the signal contained in its input to its output Otherwise it transfers 0 to its output CHART i NF CONTACT EXAMPLE Shi O00 fox SND OD If the bit marker 2000 and the digital input 1 is 0 writ
288. ts as follows selection 250 signals 250 reference manual reference feedback controller output gains 251 KP KI KD limits 117 max min type 251 parallel or classic The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output is a copy of the value of the EN input As all data type of this block are float constant or float marker we recommend to use the blocks INT2FL and FL2INT Reference Selection The reference selection argument is composed by type of data and an address The address type of data can be Constant Bit marker Digital input User parameter When the type of data is constant there are two options Automatic 0 Manual 1 Signals The signals are formed by 3 parts float 117 reference float 117 manual reference float 117 feedback float 117 control Automatic Reference Filter The Automatic reference filter is a filter passa baixa and the time constant being programmed through the argument filter Weg Language 251 The Filter argument is composed by type of data and an address The float type of data can be Constant float Float marker Manual Reference The manual reference argument is composed by a type of data end an address The float type of data can be Constant float Float marker The controller Mode The controller mode is always constant and it can be Direc
289. turn In line 5 theMX0 system bit marker content is transferred to the MX2002 bitmarker So the MX2002 bit marker will indicate if the converter is really enabled When placing the SX0 systembitmarker in the target DST of the transfer block it enables the converter When it is placed in the source SRC of the transfer block it indicates if the converter is enabled Speed reference through block set speed Line 8 displays a bit that pulses at every execution cycle of the user s program In one cycle it will be in one and in the other in zero It is necessary because the set speed block sets the converter speed in the positive 338 WLP V9 90 Weg transaction of its EN enabling bit In line 9 is the set speed block which holds the content of the P801 user parameter and it sets the converter speed In serial to the pulse bit MX2001 bit marker is the enabling return bit MX2002 bitmarker This is needed because when enabling the set speed block with the converter disabled the board will indicate E54 Drive real speed return The content of the SWO systemword marker is transferred to the MW7000 Word marker so that the real speed in rpm will be in the MW7000 word marker To execute this program the following parameters of the drive should be adjusted P202 4 vector control with encoder P220 0 local always P221 11 local reference via PLC P224 4 rotate stop local via PLC To us
290. uation Monitoring Dialogs They are dialog boxes especially created to monitor the equipment configured in the project Those dialog boxes monitor equipment exclusive information Those dialog boxes are presented according to the configured equipment and to the selected project The monitoring dialog boxes are also available in the Equipment sub menu of the Communication menu The following equipments have defined monitoring dialog boxes SRWO1 PTC and SRW01 RCD Diagnosis it presents information on the SRWOI relay general status Measurements it presents information on the SRWOI relay motor measurements Control Signals it presents commands information for the SRWOI relay control 32 Ei WLP V9 90 3 1 3 1 1 3 1 2 Menus Project New ACCESS Menu Project New Hot Key Ctrl N Standard Toolbar Dj FUNCTION Creating a new project DESCRIPTION Enter the name of the new project If the chosen name is valid the project will be open after the confirmation with OK button If the Cancel button is pressed the project is interrupted and dialog box is closed Note If the creation of a new project is required still during the application initialization you must activate button Open and then follows the previous steps Open ACCESS Menu Project Open Hot Key Ctrl 0 Standard Toolbar S FUNCTION Opens an existing project DESCRIPTION Select the project you wanto
291. umber For the integer format the executed instruction is given by Addition low result low value 1 value 2 word word word The signal bit is set when the instruction result is less than zero The overflow bit is set when low value 1 value 2 gt 32767 in this moment the low result saturates in 32767 The overflow bit is set when low value 1 value 2 lt 32768 in this moment the low result saturates in 32768 Subtraction low result low value 1 value 2 word word word The signal bit is set when the instruction result is less than zero The overflow bit is set when low value 1 value 2 gt 32767 in this moment the low result saturates in 32767 The overflow bit is set when low value 1 value 2 lt 32768 in this moment the low result saturates in 32768 Multiplication high result low result low value 1 x data 2 double word word x word High result and low result represent a 32 bits value where the high result contains the most significant 16 264 WLP V9 90 Weg bits of the multiplication and the low result contains the less significant 16 bits of the multiplication The signal bit is set when the instruction result is less than zero The overflow bit is not set since it has no action Division result high resultado low data 1 high data 1 low dado 2 word word double word word
292. umber of Revolutions For the user parameters and the word markers the considered unit for this field is the pulse number which may vary between 0 a 65535 pulses and is equivalent to a range from 0 to 359 99450 SPEED SPEED OFFSET Depending on the chosen data type the speed consists in a data type and an address or a constant value The speed data type may be constant user parameter word parameter For the constant data type the value should be programmed according to the unit configured in the project For the user parameters and the word marker the unit to be considered for this field is the RPM rotation per minute ACCELERATION DECELERATION Depending on the chosen data type the acceleration deceleration consists in a data type and an address or just a constant value The acceleration deceleration data type may be constant user parameter word marker For the constant data type the value should be programmed according to the unit configured in the project For the user parameters and word markers the unit to be considered for this field is the RPM s rotation per minute second JERK Depending on the chosen data type the jerk consists in a data type and an address or constant value The jerk data type may be constant user parameter 116 WLP V9 90 Weg word marker For the constant data type the value should be programmed according to the unit configured in the pro
293. ument is configured as MC SwitchNegative the movement will be in the negative direction But when the LimitSwitch is found the motor stops and changes the movement to the positive direction When leaving the AbsSwitch the motor stops again and changes the movement to the negative direction When a falling edge in AbsSwitch SwitchMode MC EdgeOff occurs the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred All the movements are performed with an acceleration deceleration programmed in the Standard Profile except when the LimitSwitch is found when the motor stops instantly When returning to the falling edge position of the AbsSwitch the Done output of the block bit marker 6503 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit marker 6501 and 6502 are reset The Done output bit marker 6503 will remain in 1 while the Execute input bit marker 6500 is set Weg Language 197 7 5 2 11 MC_StepLimitSwitch SYMBOL Execute ML StepLimitSwitch Direction LimitSwitchh lode Velocity CommandAborted Error ErrorlC DESCRIPTION It executes the search of the position of the LimitSwitch MOVING PART LimitSwitch or om LimitSwitch When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments The AbsSwitch can only be connected to digital inputs 1 2 or 3 seeing that the programmed function of
294. ument is not changed If the input EN is ON the Accumulated Value CV is reset on the false to true transition of input EN and the main or auxiliary encoder pulses counting starts When the Accumulated Value CV reaches the counting reference REF CNT the output Q is turned ON during one scan cycle After one scan cycle the output Q is turned OFF If a reset command occurs the Accumulated Value CV argument is reset When the input PRESET is ON the Accumulated Value CV argument will have the same value of the argument Preset PV FLOWCHART Ei Language 257 CTENC S CY is not i changed Reached the programmed count EXAMPLE LEI MOE Mole sM 1 O00 aM FSO02 MFa000 MF2001 Modo 1 Principal MA LOO oe a E E E L When digital input 1 is ON the encoder pulses counter block is enabled the float register 9002 is reset and the main encoder pulses counting is started If digital input 2 is turned ON the preset value on the float register 9001 is transferred to the float register 9002 When the float register value reaches the reference value which is on the float register 9000 the digital output 1 is turned ON since counter block output Q turns ON for one scan cycle digital output 1 can be reset by the bit register 1001 If the bit register 1000 is Ei 258 WLP V9 90 turned ON the float register value is reset 7 5 6 7 CTENC2 SYMBOL
295. unication Toolbar Bal FUNCTION Writes the user program into the board IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Upload ACCESS Menu Communicate Upload Hot Key Alt F8 El Communication Toolbar hl FUNCTION Reads the user program into the board 70 WLP V9 90 Weg 3 8 3 3 8 4 3 8 4 1 3 8 4 2 3 8 4 3 3 8 4 4 IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Only available for the CFW 11 SoftPLC and the SSW 06 SoftPLC For the CFW 11 SoftPLC it is possible to protect this function via password For more details verify the project properties 341 Online Monitoring ACCESS Menu Comumnication Online Monitoring Hot Key F9 Communication Toolbar tel FUNCTION Activate or deactivate the oniline monitoring IMPORTANT Check the Communication Configurations 72 Config Online Monitoring Signed ACCESS Menu Communication Config Online Monitoring Signed FUNCTION During online monitoring it changes all the monitoring boxes to a format with signal Not Signed ACCESS Menu Communication Config Online Monitoring Not Signed FUNCTION During online monitoring it changes all the monitoring boxes to a format without signal Decimal ACCESS Menu Communication Config Online Monitoring Decimal FUNCTION During online monitoring it changes all the monitoring boxes to a decimal format Hexadecimal ACCESS Menu Commu
296. unsecieideneteerieerndic 71 Trend Vanables scsicccsedcccececcteccaescrsarcencrstdncesnconccacncearenescdcanashdaruanueanactbueqctaudaescussstenscat nasseeececasnteesersececavanndauvecs 71 Monitoring Input OUTDUNS aiseiciciie ctetsecewsecncceneaceccoec tevecsecveicevteiennceeicteecncctuadesseseud cudececoncccevacestvisundexeedtscesstecteee 71 Monitoring Dy EEE EE E EEEn 72 FORGE INpUlS OPUS iacisecaccccteet sacecseseecediecvecdeddcundasvonceatensannseutacseasceeestacbantechonstdeuseaweceedecesvassensaivercastenssacenectc 72 General IMPON MAR ON socorrer eE EEEE Eaa 72 COMM E A E E EE E ENE E E E E E E E E 72 9 User BOCK assassnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nannan nnan nnna 73 OTE UT AUN OUD saiia aaa EEEE AEEA aE RAEE 73 MNP OTIYA GOIN anirien aa EEA ia iai iia 73 10 Window ou csc cecceccencescescueeseescesceseeeneeneeeeeeesaeeueeueeueseeeueeuecueeuesaseuseuseuseneeuseuseuseueeeseeeauseaeeuenensenss 74 GP 74 PINTS ge Z eg EN A 74 eV e E A E E E 74 Te Sen E a E 74 COMMGINGS sireci ra nea EEAS EEEa IEIET 74 MP 74 Parte IV Edit Operations 15 T Se 75 2 MOVNO GEIS recs eee E E 76 3 PNG 77 Parte V Monitoring T7 eo eo EE EE 77 2 TMU 78 STONE NNN eee 78 4 Monitoring Numerics Values in the Ladder nnnxernnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnr 81 5 Ladder Variable Write revanrenannvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnennnnenn
297. ure WLP installation set When executing the SETUP EXE file the following table will appear In this first screen the WLP version which will be installed is displayed To proceed with the installation click on the Next button fe Setup WLP VX YZ WLP VX YZ Welcome to the WLP VX YZ Setup Wizard This will install WLP VX YZ on pour computer It is recommended that you close all other applications before continuing tl Click Next to continue or Cancel to exit Setup 3 a ooo lay Copyright C 1999 2007 WEG S A Figure WLP installation presentation screen Afterwards the software license and information will be showed click Next The next screen shows the folder where the WLP will be installed The default folder C WEG WLP WLP 318 WLP V9 90 Weg version is recommended Continue with Next Select Destination Location Where should WLP Ve be installed Setup wall install WLP VASA into the following folder To continue click Nest 1f vo would like to select different folder click Browse At least 4 8 ME of free disk space is required Figure WLP installation directory screen In the next table select the Typical option and click on the Next button Select Components Which components should be installed Select the components You want to Install clear the components you do not want to Install Click Nest when You are ready to continue Help Files
298. urrent reference for the drive control ramps speed direction etc The selection of the reference type is done at the MODE argument The speed reference has the options of 13 bit value or rpm The torque current reference is set in percentage of the motor nominal current OPERATION Speed Mode If the EN input is 0 then the block is not executed and the ENO output stays 0 If the EN input is 1 the drive general enable is active and no other movement block is active then the run stop command goes to 1 the speed reference is written at the drive and the ENO output goes to 1 If the EN input suffers a transition from to 0 while the block were active the run stop command goes to 0 and the ENO output also goes to 0 Torque Mode If the EN input is 0 then the block is not executed and the ENO output stays 0 If the EN input is 1 the drive control mode is vector with encoder or sensorless the drive general enable is active and no other movement block is active then the run stop command goes to 1 the torque current reference is written at the drive and the ENO output also goes to I If the EN input suffers a transition from 1 to 0 while the block were active the speed mode is activated the run stop command goes to 0 and the ENO output also goes to 0 NOTE Negative values for speed reference or torque current reference impose a opposite movement of the motor of the direction defined on the drive FLOWCHART
299. ut EN output ENO and 33 arguments which are A function block called MMC Multimotor Control which together with the SSW06 optional IOS6 board makes the automatic starting of up to three motors possible has been developed for multimotor drive systems Properties of the Motor 1 2 or 3 START Starts the motor with 1 STOP Stops the motor with 0 FAULT Stops the motor with 0 STARTING It indicates starting or stopping motor BYPASS Indicates closed by pass SRC1 Source datum SRC2 Source datum SRC3 Source datum DST1 Destination datum DST2 Destination datum DST3 Destination datum OPERATION For more details on the operation refer to the Multimotor Application Guide available together with the SSW 06 documentation 308 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 6 7 6 1 User Blocks User Blocks installed in the WLP The block USEREB 294 is responsible for the execution of a subroutine created by the user In the WLP setup program there are available some USERFBblocks with predefined functions for the user application Find below a brief description of these blocks ANALOG I Analog input conversion It converts the value read at analog input in binary format to an engineering unit as defined by the scale ANALOG 0 Analog output conversion It converts the engineering unit value with a defined scale to the analog output in binary format DIAMCALC Diameter calculation It ca
300. uted the LimitSwitch is not activated since the Direction argument is configured as MC_Negative the movement will be in the negative direction When a falling edge occurs in LimitSwitch SwitchMode MC_EdgeOn the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred In case 2 when the block is executed the LimitSwitch is activated but even with the Direction argument configured as MC Negative the movement will be in the positive direction and when leaving the LimitSwitch the motor stops and changes the movement to the negative direction When the leading edge in LimitSwitch SwitchMode MC_EdgeOn occurs the motor stops and returns to the position in which the edge occurred All the movements are performed with an acceleration deceleration programmed in the Standard Profile except when the LimitSwitch is found case in which the motor stops instantly When returning to the leading edge position of the LimitSwitch the Done output of the block bit marker 6503 is set and the Busy and Active signals of this block bit marker 6501 and 6502 are reset The Done output bit marker 6503 will remain in while the Execute input bit marker 6500 is set l 200 WLP V9 90 7 5 2 12 MC_StepRefPulse SYMBOL Execute ML StepRerPulse Direction Velocity SerPaosition Command4borted Error ErrorlO DESCRIPTION It executes the search for the null pulse When there is a transition from
301. utions and the curve type will be according to the contents of word markers 13100 and 13101 0 linear and 1 cubic spline Inserting the same values in the CAM PROFILES tool we can observe the curve below Ei Language 209 7 5 2 17 E CAM Edit lt CamTable1 cpr alala Maximun number of points 200 Master Speed 1 0000 rpm Cursor Values Master 0 500000 Slave 1 666667 Speed 3 333833 Acceleration G000000 Jerk 0 000000 Cancel Help A When the calculation of point table 11 is finished the Done output bit marker 8001 is set while the Execute input remains set With the bit marker 8001 set the MC Camln block can be executed MC Camin SYMBOL Execute ML Camin CamTablelD Command 4borted Error ErrorlD Bufferklode EndOfFrofile DESCRIPTION The MC Camln block is responsible for the execution of a positioning defined by a point table of a CAM curve previously selected by the MC CamTableSelect block or previously calculated by the MW CamCalc block When there is a transition from 0 to I in the Execute input the block will be started and executed according to the configured arguments ARGUMENTS It consists of I Execute input I InGear output and 11 arguments which are Master 118 Ei 210 WLP V9 90 Slave 118 Cam Table ID 126 Buffer Mode 119 Busy 128 Active 128 Command Aborted 128 Error 128 Erro
302. values during on line monitoring For more details verify the numeric value monitoring 81 and the communication menu Correction of functional deviations V6 20 The online monitoring keeps monitoring boxes from blocks that have been erased and changed by others Several problems related to button bars and windows blinking during online monitoring were solved During online monitoring incorrect values were read when trying parameter upload in the parameter box It allowed project page erasing when it was a single page which caused an illegal operation An error occurred while moving blocks that had exceeded the edition area due to increase of their size compared to the saved version of the project WLP V6 20 New Blocks CAM 11671 creation of CAM positioning profiles for POS2 SPEED 218 drive speed reference Changed blocks SETSPEEP 213 JOG 216 SCURVE 153 TCURVE 156 TCURVAR 165 HOME 159 INPOS 239 INBWG 241 STOP 146 QSTOP 150 FOLLOW 227 MSCANWEG 278 SHIFT 183 Added axis 116 selection parameter STOP 146 QSTOP 150 Added control 117 selection parameter Correction of functional deviations V6 11 File opening fault with blocks of different sizes in projects of version V5 10R2 Macro parameter inclusion for all PID 250 parameters Comment block fault when Control Enter is used for more than one line TCURVAR 165 block copy paste fault not all markers were copied F
303. ve of the acceleration as time function Thus we can conclude that the max acceleration will be reached at 50000 rpm s 230000 rpm s 2 0 22 seconds 156 WLP V9 90 Weg 7 5 2 2 TCURVE SYMBOL EN TCURWE ENO SIGH POSITION POSITION SPEEO ACCELERATION MODE Aes DESCRIPTION It is formed by 1 EN input I ENO output and 5 arguments as follows speed 115 acceleration 115 mode 116 axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enable The ENO output informs the moment that the block is finished OPERATION If the EN input is 0 the block will not be executed and the ENO output keeps in 0 If EN is activated for at least one scan cycle and there is no other active movement block a positioning with trapezoidal profile will be executed based on the arguments programmed When the positioning is finished the ENO output goes to 1 for one scan cycle and then returns to 0 Important This block operates with position loop so when it stops it continues in closed loop of position CINEMATIC EQUATIONS x X0 vO t 1 2 a t 12 v v0 a t 1 2 x end position xO start position v end speed vO start speed a end acceleration FLOWCHART SER Language 157 ls there one nee Jo ositioning active EN 0 start positioning Did positioning finish finish the block CHART 158 Ei WLP V9 90 EN TC
304. ve position reaches 10 1 revolution and disables the ENO output when the position drops around 9 9 revolutions The hysteresis is given in percent and can vary between 0 0 and 50 0 If it is programmed by parameter the unit will be per thousand varying from 0 to 500 FLOW CHART 240 WLP V9 90 Ei INPOS position signal programmed position Is actual position N So programmed position ENO 1 ENO 0 CHART shaft Position Minimum Position EN ENO EXAMPLE 0 0 Ei Language 241 7 5 5 2 ol oe EM Fosto M SIGN 50 00 FOSITION 20 HYSTERESIS w HFORMAT Felatizo M MODE CORP Feal HASIS IHPOS ENO In this example the block INPOS is always activated In this case if the motor is in the positive position higher or equal to 50 revolutions considering a 2 hysteresis it writes 1 to the digital output Otherwise it writes 0 INBWG SYMBOL EN INBUG ENO DIRECTION SFEED HYSTERESIS ASIS DESCRIPTION It consists of 1 EN input 1 ENO output and 4 arguments being axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enabling The ENO output goes high when the motor speed is higher or equal to the programmed value plus the hysteresis and the direction of rotation is the same as the programmed Hysteresis Depending on the chosen data type the hysteresis is formed by 1 data type and 1 address or constant Th
305. ve the maximum allowed STOP SYMBOL 74 Drive in Homing status Id 52 70 71 P202 different from 4 PLC 74 78 81 82 DECELERATION MODE CONTROL AAIS DESCRIPTION It is formed by 1 EN input 1 ENO output and 4 arguments deceleration 115 mode 147 control n axis 116 The EN input is responsible for the block enable Weg Language 147 The ENO output informs the moment when the block is terminated Mode The mode is always a constant There are two options avaliable feed enable kill motion OPERATION If the EN input is 0 this block is not active the ENO output remains at 0 If the EN input goes 1 even for a short time at least one scan cycle a stop with trapezoidal profile will be executed based on the characteristics programmed in the arguments When the stop has been finished the ENO output goes I for one scan cycle and then returns to 0 Once started the stop block can not be cancelled until it has been completely finished even if the EN input changes to 0 before the end of ramp The feed enable mode causes the block stop while the EN input is 1 As soon as the input EN changes to 0 the previous active positioning block is restored since the current position do not be higher or equal to the desired one This can occur if the deceleration of the stop block is too slow The kill motion mode does not restore the previous positioning if the EN input returns
306. version Why word math is not compatible with the equipment and specified firmware version Action erase block check block or check configured equipment Error C119 encoder input is not allowed for this equipment Why encoder counter was programmed with an input that is not available for the specified equipment Action erase block or check configured equipment Error C120 counting mode is not allowed for this equipment Why encoder counter was programmed with a counting mode that is not available for the specified encoder input Action check block programming Error C121 USERFB is not allowed for USERFB block Why USERFB block inserted into USERFB ladder program Action delete the USERFB block Error C122 programming no allowed for this version of firmware equipment Why option or value for the block is not allowed for selected firmware version or equipament 312 Ei WLP V9 90 8 4 Action check block programming or change de properties of project Error C123 File cannot be found Why The file has not been found in the specified pass Action Verify the block programming checking if it aims to the refereed file Error C124 Cam profile cannot be generated Why Cam profile binary file has not been generated Action Verify the programming and possible errors generated for the Cam blocks inserted in the project Error C125 Memory reserved for Cam profiles exceeded Why Th
307. verted to the engineering unit 0 to 3000 In line 8 of page 2 the MF9004 float marker is converted to integer and stored in the MW7001 word marker Concisely the analog input of 4 a 20 mA that has its content represented as 6553 to 32767 is converted to an engineering unit with 0 to 3000 scale and stored in theMF9004 andMW 7001 markers To activate converter the analog input of 4 to 20mA you should turn on n the switch for that function 350 WLP V9 90 Ei 10 7 8 Motor control speed through PID block Tutor11 0 l 2 3 4 5 T g a READ ANALOG INPUT AND CONVERT TO FLOAT POINT 4 20m 2 10 Vee 6553 32767 ME S407 TWLOL MSRC DET gt MM W77000 3 M3407 SMW FO00 HINT FLOAT Ib kent rondo 5 SUBTRACT OFFSET dma 6553 MX3407 MFoOOO MDATA 1 gt MF9O0D1 nm OPERATOR 5 55e 003 MDATA 2 g p C LIMIT VALUE WITHOU OFFSET dam 4 20m 0 26214 MME S407 l1 EN SAT ENO lt MFood MIN OUT b bAMF9002 12 262e 004 HMA O 00e 000 H MIN 13 Figure Tutor11 Page 1 of 5 weg Tutorial 351 0 l z 3 4 5 CONVERT ANALOGIC INPUT 4 20m 0 26214 gt 0 MAE Y EN MATH ENO DATA 1 saM F9003 OPERATOR DATA 2 EN MATH ENO DATA 1 6M FoO04 OPERATOR DATA 2 CONVERT FLOAT POINT HUMBER TO INTEGER MI F9002 a 3 002 003 3 4 oMFSOOS 5 i 2 62e 004 6 EN FLZINT ENO MF9004 MO WFIOO G Figure Tuto
308. ween input and output T l 3 4 5 T 2 a switch G E1 m Figure First example in ladder 1 16 step According to next figure the program is ready 328 WLP V9 90 Weg WEG Ladder Programmer Tutor1e ldd Tutor1e ldd EN Project Edit View Page Insert Tools Build Communicate Macro Window Help D me Fal ER el k R al li aa be beby ee dede so sj jan l SE wela 2 sjel le HHe alet sene vaere al 0 l 2 3 4 5 7 B J Z H rtch 1 Ox El 0 mm rm hl 7 To help press F PLC1 01 V1 80 Page 1 of 1 Figure Example program ready 17 step On this stage one should compile the program For such click on the compile button Figure Compilation button During the compilation the compilation status box will be displayed Figure 49 indicating thecompilation process EH Assembling the user program Mrarmninge 1 Errors 0 Figure Compilation status box After the compilation another box will be displayed indicating if some compilationerror was generated Ei Tutorial 329 Compilation Errors WEG Ladder Programmer V 00 Alpha Copyright C 1999 2006 VEG All Fights reserved Message sintaxs File name Page Line Column Code message TUTORLE BIN 0 erroris 0 warnings s plication size 318 bytes Figure Compilation result box 168
309. which are Axis 118 Error 128 Error Id 128 Retentive Block 129 The Execute input is responsible for enabling the block The Done output informs the instant in which the block is finished OPERATION MODE When MC Reset block is executed the drive does not change the current operating mode In the execution of the block the shaft status will change to Disabled only if the status was in Errorstop BLOCK ERRORS Error 1 P202 different from 4 PLC EXAMPLE 0 1 bi a fa F cr 4 on KE Execute ML Reset 1 1 gt 1 1 gt 24 SW3406 1 0 With the real shaft in Errorstop status SW3406 1 and a transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 the MC Reset block will be executed and the shaft status will change to Disabled 7SW3406 0 The Done output bit marker 6501 will remain set while the Execute input is in 1 If a fault occurs on the drive the shaft status will change to Errorstop 7SW3406 1 142 WLP V9 90 Weg When a transition from 0 to 1 of the bit marker 6500 occurs again the MC Reset block will be executed and the shaft status will change to Disabled SW3406 0 The Done output bit marker 6501 will remain set while the Execute input is in 1 7 5 1 3 MC Stop SYMBOL Execute Deceleration Jerk Buffer lode Command4borted Error ErrorlO DESCRIPTION It executes a stop When there is a transition from 0 to I in th
310. y to the left for the immediate right element A vertical connection element must consist of vertical lines intersected by one or more horizontal connections at each side The vertical connection status should represent the OR of the 1 status of the horizontal connections of the left side 1 e the status of the vertical connections should be 0 if all horizontal connections including the left ones are 0 1 if the status of one or more horizontal connections including the left ones is 1 28 WLP V9 90 Weg 2 5 The status of the vertical connections should be copied for all horizontal connections associated to the right ones The status of the vertical connections cannot be copied for all horizontal connections associated to the left ones EXECUTION CONTROL Figure 1 shows how the Ladder program is executed PLC1 executes continuously one scan cycle The cycle starts reading the values of the inputs and outputs signals and saving them in the internal memory A Inputs read to the memory B Memory write at the outputs C Ladder line scanning Then the lines of the Ladder program are executed in a fixed order by starting with the first line During the program scanning new values of the physical outputs as determined by the logic of the different Ladder lines can be modified int the memory Finally after Ladder program concluded the program execution one scan cycle the outputs image is writeen to the
311. yed in next three figures After the execution of the machine zero search block 346 WLP V9 90 Ei EN TRANSFER ENO EN TRANSFER ENO SAL or VA TSG or WS EN TRANSFER ENO or 750 HSRC Figure P756 1 P757 0 e P758 0 66 g curve positioning with position 10 00 EN TRANSFER ENO SRC After the execution of the or Wy S EN TRANSFER ENO or WS HSRC EN TRANSFER ENO oP WYSE HSRC Figure P756 1 P757 10 e P758 0 66 g curve positioning with position 10 00 EN TRANSFER ENO EN TRANSFER ENO EN TRANSFER ENO SAL After the execution of the ea or WS or WT Se Figure P756 0 P757 10 e P758 0 eg Tutorial 347 10 7 6 Analog Input Reading 0 10Vdc Tutor9 l 3 4 5 T g F 7 READ ANALOGINPUT AND CONVERTER TO FLOAT POINT HUMBER MLE 407 i IWLOL HSRC DST p 4MW7O0DO 2 MTF TOO MFSOOO 4 r CONVERT ANALOG INPUT 0 10 ee gt 0 52767 gt 0 MAR Y ole 40 MLE 407 EM MATH ERO oI FSOOO HOATA 1 ol F9002 7 OPERATOR 3 00e 005 H DATA oll S40 EN MATH ENO NI F9002 MDATA 1 vok FSO0S 10 i H OPERATOR J 28e O04 HOIATA 2 CONVERT FLOAT POINT NUMBER TO INTEGER HUMBER 12 vM S407 EN FL2INT ENO oh FY003 H FLOAT INT eM 700 14 Figure Tutor9 Functioning In line 1 the a

WLP - Software Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents